CONTRACTUAL REQUIREMENTS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

For

Ceramics Classroom

Clovis Unified School District Clovis West High School
1070 E. Teague, Fresno CA 93720

PHA PROJECT NO. 2023-06 Construction Set
May 5, 2023

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 000110 TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION	PAGES

000101     PROJECT TITLE PAGE ...................................................................................           1 000110     TABLE OF CONTENTS....................................................................................           4

DIVISION 00	CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS	PAGES

(NOT USED)

DIVISION 01	GENERAL REQUIREMENTS	PAGES

011100	SUMMARY OF WORK .....................................................................................	5 011105	USE OF ARCHITECT’S ELECTRONIC FILES .................................................	3 012300	ALTERNATES..................................................................................................	2 012500	SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES......................................................................	6 012600	CONCTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES...............................................	3 012613	REQUEST FOR INFORMATION......................................................................	3 012900	PAYMENT PROCEDURES ..............................................................................	5 013113	PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION..........................................	6 013119	PROJECT MEETINGS .....................................................................................	4 013200	CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION........................................	9 013233	PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION.............................................................	2 013300	SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES............................................................................         11 014000	QUALITY AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS....................................................	8 015000	TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS..................................................         11 016000	PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ..........................................................................	5 017300	EXECUTION.....................................................................................................         10 017419	CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL..........................	9 017700	CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES............................................................................	5 017823	OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.......................................................	9 017836	WARRANTIES..................................................................................................	3 017839	PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS....................................................................	3 017900	DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING................................................................	4

DIVISION 02	EXISTING CONDITIONS	PAGES

024109	SELECTIVE DEMOLITION...............................................................................	6

2023-06	TABLE OF CONTENTS	0001010 – 1 of 4

DIVISION 03	CONCRETE	PAGES

031000	CONCRETE FORMWORK...............................................................................	4 032000	CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT......................................................................	3 033000	CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE..........................................................................	7 033518	CONCRETE SEALER.......................................................................................	4

DIVISION 04	MASONRY	PAGES

NOT USED

DIVISION 05	METALS	PAGES

NOT USED

DIVISION 06	WOOD AND PLASTICS	PAGES

061000     ROUGH CARPENTRY .....................................................................................           7 066400     FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELING ........................................           4

DIVISION 07	THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION	PAGES

072100	THERMAL INSULATION..................................................................................	5 072616	UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER..................................................................	4 079200	JOINT SEALANTS............................................................................................         12

DIVISION 08	DOORS AND WINDOWS	PAGES

NOT USED

DIVISION 09	FINISHES	PAGES

092900	GYPSUM BOARD ............................................................................................	9 096513	RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES..........................................................	5 099100	PAINTING.........................................................................................................         18

DIVISION 10	SPECIALITES	PAGES

NOT USED

DIVISION 11	EQUIPMENT	PAGES

2023-06	TABLE OF CONTENTS	0001010 – 2 of 4

NOT USED

DIVISION 12	FURNISHINGS	PAGES

NOT USED

DIVISION 13	SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION	PAGES

NOT USED

DIVISION 14	CONVEYING SYSTEMS	PAGES

NOT USED

DIVISION 15	PAGES

NOT USED

DIVISIONS 16 - 21	PAGES

NOT USED

DIVISION 22	PLUMBING	PAGES

220000     PLUMBING.......................................................................................................         15 220500     GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING......................................................         15

DIVISION 23	HEATING VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING	PAGES

NOT USED

DIVISION 26	ELECTRICAL	PAGES

260500     COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECRICAL...............................................         18 262000     LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL TRAMISSION..................................................           8

DIVISION 31	EARTHWORK	PAGES

312333	TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL.........................................................	7

DIVISION 32	EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS	PAGES

2023-06	TABLE OF CONTENTS	0001010 – 3 of 4

321313	SITE CONCRETE IMPROVEMENTS...............................................................	4

DIVISION 33	UTILITIES	PAGES

333000	SITE SEWER SYSTEMS..................................................................................	4

APPENDIX	TITLE	PAGES

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

2023-06	TABLE OF CONTENTS	0001010 – 4 of 4

SECTION 011100 SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	Section includes:

1.	Project information.
2.	Work covered by Contract Documents. 3.	Phased construction.
4.	Work by Owner.
5.	Work by separate contracts.
6.	Owner furnished, contractor installed products. 7.	Access to site.
8.	Coordination with occupants. 9.	Work restrictions.
10.	Specification and drawing conventions.

B.	Related Section:

1.	 Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3	PROJECT INFORMATION

A.	Project Identification:

CUSD Clovis West High School – Ceramics Classroom

Architect’s Project Number: 2023-06

B.	Owner:

Clovis Unified School District 1450 Herndon Ave.
Clovis, CA, 93611

Telephone: N/A Contact: Nick Mele.

2023-06	SUMMARY OF WORK	011100 1 of 5

C.	Architect:

Paul Halajian Architects 389 Clovis Ave., Suite 100 Clovis, CA 93612

Telephone (559) 297-7900 Contact: Paul Halajian

1.4	WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A.	 The Work of the Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1.	All construction and services required for the installation of new trench drain, electrical work and concrete slab in the Ceramics Classroom at Clovis West High School.

1.5	WORK BY OWNER

A.	 General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner.

B.	 Preceding Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract begins.

1.	None

C.	 Concurrent Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.

D.	 Subsequent Work:	Owner will perform the following additional work at site after Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory work under this Contract.

1.	None.

1.6	WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS

A.	 General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

B.	 Preceding Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site.	Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract begins.

2023-06	SUMMARY OF WORK	011100 2 of 5

C.	 Concurrent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.

1.7	OWNER-FURNISHED CONTRACTOR-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A.	 Owner will furnish products indicated.	The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products.

B.	Owner-Furnished Products:

1.	Toilet Accessories

1.8	ACCESS TO SITE

A.	 General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.

B.	 Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1.	 Driveways, Walkways and Entrances:	Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a.	 Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.
b.	 Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

1.9	COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A.	 Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and adjacent building(s) during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

1.	 Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.	 Notify the Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

1.10	WORK RESTRICTIONS

2023-06	SUMMARY OF WORK	011100 3 of 5

A.	Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1.	 Comply with limitations on use of public streets and other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B.	 On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, except as otherwise indicated.

1.	 Submit a written request to the Architect for work hours outside of the indicted on-site hours; request subject to review by the Owner.

C.	 Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1.	 Notify Architect and Owner not less than 2 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2.	 Obtain Architect’s and Owner’s written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D.	 Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1.	 Notify Architect and Owner not less than 2 days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.
2.	 Obtain Architect’s and Owner’s written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

E.	 Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted.

1.11	SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A.	 General: Specifications establish minimum quality standards for products, materials, and installation requirements unless more stringent requirements are indicated on the Drawings; Drawings establish material and product location and quantity.

1.       Where requirements for materials and/or products indicated on the Drawings are not specified, provide heavy duty commercial grade products and materials.

B.	 Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C.	 Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1.	 Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2023-06	SUMMARY OF WORK	011100 4 of 5

2.	 Specification requirements shall be complied with by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

D.	 Drawing Content, Material and Product Identification:	Materials and products are identified on Drawings by typical generic terms used in the individual Specification Sections unless materials and products are described in detail on the Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

END OF SECTION

2023-06	SUMMARY OF WORK	011100 5 of 5

SECTION 011105
USE OF ARCHITECTS ELECTRONIC FILES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	 Section includes Administrative and procedural requirements for use of Architect’s electronic files.

B.	Related Sections:

1.	Division 01 Section “Project Management and Coordination.” 2.	Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”
3.	Division 01 Section “Project Record Drawings.”

1.3	USE OF ARCHITECT’S ELECTRONIC FILES

A.	Architect may make available to Contractor digital data files of Architect’s Drawings for use in preparing shop drawings, coordination drawings, and project record drawings.

1.	Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings.
2.	Files will be supplied on a Digital Download or CD ROM in DWG format.

B.	 Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers of this Project shall jointly execute a waiver of Liability for each use of the Architects electronic files and shall be responsible for the use of electronic files.

1.	 Liability Form:	“ELECTRONIC DATA FILE DISTRIBUTION WAIVER OF LIABILITY FORM” included at the end of this Specification Section.

C.	 The use of the electronic files shall only be used for this Project and for the identified purposes noted on the “ELECTRONIC DATA FILE DISTRIBUTION WAIVER OF LIABILITY FORM.” The CD ROM or any files contained on it shall not be duplicated without written permission of the Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

2023-06

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

USE OF ARCHITECT’S ELECTRONIC FILES	011105 - 1 of 3

END OF SECTION

(Electronic Data File Distribution Waiver of Liability included on the following page)

2023-06	USE OF ARCHITECT’S ELECTRONIC FILES	011105 - 2 of 3

ELECTRONIC DATA FILE DISTRIBUTION WAIVER OF LIABILITY

Paul Halajian Architects 389 Clovis Ave., Suite 100 Clovis, California 93612

Project: Clovis West High School Ceramics Classroom

Intended Use: ________________________________________________________________

Any electronic data, files or information provided under this Agreement are the property of the above listed Professionals and consultants (Team). It is understood and agreed that the information contained in these electronic data file shall not be copied or duplicated for any use other than the project for which they were created. It is understood by the undersigned that compatibility of this electronic media with other systems is not guaranteed, and conversion to other systems is done at the user’s own risk.

The user hereby agrees and recognizes that designs, plans and data stored on electronic media including, but not limited to, computer disk and magnetic tape, may be subject to undetectable alteration and/or uncontrollable deterioration. It is agreed by the undersigned that the Team shall not be liable for the completeness or accuracy of any material provided on electronic media.

The undersigned agrees to defend, hold harmless and indemnify the Team and its officers, directors, employees, agents and consultants for any and all claims, losses, costs or damage whatsoever arising out of, resulting from, or in any way related to the use of electronic data files provided hereunder, whether that use is authorized or unauthorized. The user further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Team its officers, directors, employees, agents and consultants from any and all claims, damages, losses, expenses and injuries arising out of the modification of the electronic data files by the user or by anyone obtaining said files through or from the user.

The Team bears no responsibility for the information in the electronic data files once it leaves the office of Paul Halajian Architects. The undersigned understands that the electronic data files is subject to applicable copyright laws of the United States and agrees to be bound by same. Upon our receipt of this agreement duly executed by an Officer of your firm you may request the Data files on Digital Download or CD.

Name (Print/Sign): _________________________________________________ Date: ____________

Firm: ___________________________________________________________ __________________

Phone and email: _________________________________________________ __________________

Name (Print/Sign): _________________________________________________ Date: ____________

Firm: ___________________________________________________________ __________________

Phone and email: _________________________________________________ __________________

Name (Print/Sign): _________________________________________________ Date: ____________

Firm: ___________________________________________________________ __________________

Phone and email: _________________________________________________ __________________

2023-06	USE OF ARCHITECT’S ELECTRONIC FILES	011105 - 3 of 3

SECTION 012300 ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3	DEFINITIONS

A.	Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1.	 Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.
2.	 The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4	PROCEDURES

A.	 Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1.	 Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B.	 Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration.	Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.

C.	Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D.	Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section.

2018-43	ALTERNATES	012300 1 of 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A.	Deductive Alternate #01:	Installation of cord reel mounted on the ceiling.

END OF SECTION

2018-43	ALTERNATES	012300 2 of 2

SECTION 012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

B.	Related Sections:

1.	 Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
2.	 Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements and limitations for substitutions.

1.3	DEFINITIONS

A.	 Substitutions:	Changes in products, materials, construction from those required by the Contract Contractor.

equipment, Documents

and methods of and proposed by

1.	 Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.
2.	 Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to the Owner.

1.4	SUBMITTALS

A.	 Substitution Requests: Submit four (4) paper copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced.	Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1.	Substitution Request Form: Use form provided at the end of this Section.
2.	 Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:

a.	 Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable.

2023-06	SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES	012500 1 of

b.	 Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c.	 Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified.	Include annotated copy of applicable specification section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.
d.	 Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.
e.	Samples, where applicable or requested.
f.	Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
g.	 List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
h.	 Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.
i.	 Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES.
j.	 Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time.	If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.
k.	 Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
l.	 Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
m.	 Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3.	Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a.	Forms of Acceptance:

1)	 Substitutions Prior to Bid: Addenda will be issued for substitutions accepted prior to bid.
2)	 Substitutions After Award of Contract: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

2023-06	SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES	012500 2 of

b.	 Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.5	QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.	 Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6	PROCEDURES

A.	 Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1	SUBSTITUTIONS

A.	 Substitutions Prior to Bid: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 21 days prior to the submission of bids. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

1.	 Conditions: Architect will consider bidder’s request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied.

a.	 Substitutions prior to bid shall also be subject to the requirements of applicable Division 00 Specification Sections.
b.	 Substitutions prior to bid shall comply with the requirements for Substitutions for Cause or Substitutions for Convenience as applicable.

2.	 Substitutions requested by bidders during the bidding period, and accepted by Addendum prior to award of the Contract, are considered as included in the Contract Documents.

B.	 Substitutions After Award of Contract: The Contractor after award of the Contract, as allowed by the General Conditions, may submit materials and methods to be considered for substitutions.

1.	The following are not considered to be substitutions:

a.	Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. b.	Specified options of products and construction methods included in the
Contract Documents.
c.	 The Contractor’s compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities.

2023-06	SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES	012500 3 of

C.	 Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery of need for change, but not later than 21 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

1.	 Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a.	 Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.
b.	Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
c.	 Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
d.	 Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
e.	Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
f.	 Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
g.	Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
h.	 If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

D.	 Substitutions for Convenience:	Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

1.	 Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a.	 Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
b.	 Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
c.	 Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.
d.	Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
e.	 Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
f.	 Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
g.	Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2023-06	SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES	012500 4 of

h.	 Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
i.	Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
j.	 If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION	(Not Used)

END OF SECTION

(Substitution Request Form included on the following page)

2023-06	SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES	012500 5 of

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

FOR:	Clovis West High School Ceramics Classroom

We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for the above project:

SECTION

________________________________

PARAGRAPH

__________________________________

SPECIFIED ITEM

__________________________________

Proposed Substitution: _______________________________________________________________________________________

Attach complete technical data, including laboratory tests, if applicable.

Include complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed substitution will require for its proposed installation.

Fill in the blanks below:

A.	Does the substitution affect dimension on Drawings:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________

B.	Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing costs caused by the requested substitution?

__________________________________________________________________________________________________

C.	What affect does substitution have on other trades?

__________________________________________________________________________________________________

D.	Difference between proposed substitution and specified item?

__________________________________________________________________________________________________

E.	Manufacturer's guarantees of the proposed and specified items are:

________ Same	________ Different (explain on attachment)

F.	Cost difference between proposed substitution and specified item - savings to Owner?

__________________________________________________________________________________________________

The undersigned states that the function, appearance and quality are equivalent or superior to the specified item and will be at no additional cost to the Owner.

Submitted to the Architect by:

Signature: ______________________________________	For Use by Design Consultant

Firm:

Address:

______________________________________

______________________________________

______________________________________

Accepted Accepted as Noted Not Accepted Received Too Late

________ ________ ________ ________

Date:

Telephone:

______________________________________

______________________________________

By:

Date:

Remarks:

_________________________________________

_________________________________________

_________________________________________

________________________________________

2023-06	SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES	012500 6 of

SECTION 012600
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	 Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

B.	Related Requirements:

1.	Division 00 Sections as applicable to contract requirements and modifications.
2.	 Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.3	CHANGES IN THE WORK, GENERAL

A.	 Governing Agency Review and Approval:	Changes to the Contract Documents affecting changes in the Work, Contract Sum, and/or Contract Time are subject to review and approval by the authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4	MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A.	Architect’s Supplemental Instruction (ASI):	For minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, the Architect will issue Architect’s Supplemental Instructions authorizing such changes.

1.	Contractor’s Response:

a.	 Contractor shall perform the work indicated in the Architect’s Supplemental Instruction without adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
b.	 If the Contractor determines that an adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time is necessary due to the Architect’s Supplemental Instruction, the Contractor shall respond to the Architect’s Supplemental Instruction as if it were an Architect/Owner initiated Proposal Request.

2023-06	CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES	012600 1 of 3

1.5	PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A.	Architect/Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1.	 Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2.	 Contractor’s Response: Within time specified in Proposal Request, or not more than 7 days after receipt of Proposal Request when not otherwise specified, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a.	 Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
b.	 Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
c.	Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d.	 Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
e.	Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect.

B.	 Contractor-Initiated Proposals:	If conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1.	 Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2.	 Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
3.	 Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
4.	Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5.	 Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
6.	 Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
7.	Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.

C.	Architect’s Response:	Within 7 days after receipt of Contractor’s Proposal or Contractor’s response to Architect/Owner initiated Proposal Request, Architect will:

1.	Issue a Change Order for accepted proposals.

2023-06	CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES	012600 2 of 3

2.	Notify the Contractor of unaccepted proposals.
3.	 Issue a Construction Change Directive where changes are necessary for the progress of the Work and changes to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time are in dispute.

1.6	CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A.	 On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor. Signed Change Orders shall be included in the Contract Documents.

1.7	CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A.	 Construction Change Directive (CCD): Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on Architect’s standard form to instruct Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1.	 Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B.	 Documentation:	Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1.	After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION

2023-06	CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES	012600 3 of 3

SECTION 012613 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	 Section includes administrative and procedural guidelines for preparation, submittal and response to Contractor’s Request for Information (RFI’s) during construction of project.

B.	Related Sections:

1.	General Conditions of the Contract.

1.3	DEFINITION

A.	RFI: Request for Information seeking information required by or clarification of the Contract Documents.

1.4	SUBMITTALS

A.	Submit RFI’s as electronic submittals via email.

1.	 RFI Form: Use form included at end of this Section. Architect will provide Contractor with electronic copy in PDF format.

a.	Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

2.	Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.
3.	 Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

2023-06	REQUEST FOR INFORMATION	012613 - 1 of 3

1.5	REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A.	 General:	Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

B.	 Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1.	Project name. 2.	Project number. 3.	Date.
4.	Name of Contractor. 5.	Name of Architect
6.	RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7.	RFI subject.
8.	Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9.	Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10.	Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11.     Contractor's suggested resolution.      If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12.	Contractor's signature.
13.	Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a.	 Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C.	Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow 10 working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1.	The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a.	Requests for approval of submittals. b.	Requests for approval of substitutions.
c.	Requests for approval of Contractor’s means and methods.
d.	 Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.
e.	Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f.	Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
g.	Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2.	 Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

2023-06	REQUEST FOR INFORMATION	012613 - 2 of 3

3.	Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a.	 If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

4.	 Distribution: One copy of each completed RFI review shall be distributed by the Architect to the Contractor and the Owner.

D.	 RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly unless otherwise directed in writing by Architect. Include the following:

1.	Project name.
2.	Name and address of Contractor. 3.	Name and address of Architect.
4.	RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5.	RFI description.
6.	Date the RFI was submitted.
7.	Date Architect's response was received.

E.	 On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within 7 days if Contractor disagrees with response.

F.	 Contractor’s Expense for RFI’s: Architect will review and respond to legitimate RFI’s at no additional cost to the Contractor. RFI’s determined by the Architect to be flagrant or unnecessary will have the expense for the Architect’s time paid by the Owner with the amount being deducted from the Contract Sum. The expense will be based on an hourly rate in accordance with the Architect’s standard hourly rate schedule in effect at the time the work is performed with a minimum of one hour for each flagrant or unnecessary RFI.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

PART 3 – EXECUTION

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

END OF SECTION

2023-06	REQUEST FOR INFORMATION	012613 - 3 of 3

SECTION 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	 Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

B.	Related Sections:

1.	 Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract.
2.	 Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.
3.	 Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the submittal schedule.

1.3	DEFINITIONS

A.	 Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4	SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A.	 Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

1.	 Correlate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a.	Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b.	Submittal schedule.
c.	 Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule.

2023-06	PAYMENT PROCEDURES	012900 1 of

2.	 Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B.	 Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values.	Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1.	 Identification:	Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a.	Project name and location. b.	Name of Architect.
c.	Architect's project number.
d.	Contractor's name and address. e.	Date of submittal.

2.	Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:

a.	Related Specification Section or Division. b.	Description of the Work.
c.	Name of subcontractor.
d.	Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e.	Name of supplier.
f.	Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
g.	 Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

1)	Labor.
2)	Materials. 3)	Equipment.

3.	 Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents.	Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of 5 percent of Contract Sum.

4.	Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5.	 Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a.	 Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance.

6.	 Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

2023-06	PAYMENT PROCEDURES	012900 2 of

7.	 Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a.	 Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

8.	 Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5	APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A.	 Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1.	 Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B.	 Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment application shall be as indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor.	The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

1.	 If dates and periods are not indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor at time of bidding, the date for Application for Payment shall be established by the Owner to correspond with the Owner’s administrative procedures in order to allow for processing and approval of Application for Payment.	The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment shall be one month.
2.	 Submit draft copy of Application for Payment 7 days prior to due date for review by Architect.

C.	 Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner for Applications for Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values.

D.	Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1.	 Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2.	 Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.

2023-06	PAYMENT PROCEDURES	012900 3 of

3.	 Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.
4.	 Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.

E.	 Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1.	 Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.
2.	 Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.
3.	Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a.	 Materials previously stored and included in previous Applications for Payment.
b.	Work completed for this Application utilizing previously stored materials. c.	Additional materials stored with this Application.
d.	Total materials remaining stored, including materials with this Application.

F.	 Transmittal: Submit 4 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1.	 Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

G.	 Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.

1.	 Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.
2.	 When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.
3.	 Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.
4.	 Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.
5.	 Waiver Forms:	Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.

H.	 Initial Application for Payment:	Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1.	List of subcontractors. 2.	Schedule of values.
3.	Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).

2023-06	PAYMENT PROCEDURES	012900 4 of

4.	Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 5.	List of Contractor's staff assignments.
6.	 Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work.
7.	Initial progress report.
8.	Report of preconstruction conference.

I.	Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portions of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1.	 Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2.	 This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

J.	 Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1.	Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2.	Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 3.	Evidence that claims have been settled.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

END OF SECTION

2023-06	PAYMENT PROCEDURES	012900 5 of

SECTION 013113
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	 Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1.	General project coordination procedures. 2.	Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3.	Coordination drawings.

B.	Related Sections:

1.	 Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule.
2.	 Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation	and	field-engineering	services,	including	establishment	of benchmarks and control points.
3.	 Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3	SUBMITTALS

A.	 List of Key Personnel Names:	Within 14 calendar days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and email addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1.	 Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

B.	Coordination Drawings:

1.	 Initial Submittal: Submit 3 printed copies of each coordination drawing for each condition where Coordination Drawings are required.
2.	Project Closeout:

2023-06	PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION	013113	1 of 6

a.	 Submit 3 printed “Record” copies of each coordination drawing for each condition where Coordination Drawings are required.
b.	Submit “Record” electronic coordination drawing files.

1.4	COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A.	 Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1.	 Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.
2.	 Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3.	Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B.	 Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1.	 Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C.	Administrative Procedures:	Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1.	Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2.	Preparation of the schedule of values.
3.	Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4.	Delivery and processing of submittals.
5.	Progress meetings.
6.	Preinstallation conferences.
7.	Startup and adjustment of systems. 8.	Project closeout activities.

D.	 Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.

1.	 Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

2023-06	PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION	013113	2 of 6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1	COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A.	 Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. Coordination Drawings shall include the work of multiple trades on the same drawing. Prepare Coordination Drawings in addition to Shop Drawings required in individual Sections.

1.	 Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a.	 Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.
b.	 Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.
c.	 Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
d.	 Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.
e.	 Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.
f.	Indicate required installation sequences.
g.	 Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts.	Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B.	 Coordination Drawings, Required:	Coordination drawings shall include plans, elevations, sections, and details of the Work for each trade as required to adequately represent the work. Clearly indicate and identify conflicts between components for review by Architect. Provide Coordination Drawings as follows:

1.	 Overhead Work and Work Above Finished Ceilings: Include subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, conduit and piping runs, plumbing, mechanical, and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Show the work of each trade including, but not limited to, pipe runs, mechanical ductwork, cable trays, conduit runs, and bracing and supports.

2023-06	PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION	013113	3 of 6

a.	 Indicate locations of all dampers, valves, cleanouts and other devices requiring human access for maintenance and repair. Where access panels are required, show locations and indicate size.
b.	 Show the height above finish floor each item, demonstrating sufficient space for installation and maintenance. Indicate sizes of ducts, piping and similar items.
c.	 Layout of work shall be done in such a manner to avoid conflicts between the work of different trades, finish ceiling heights, soffits, light fixtures or other finish work at ceilings and soffits.
d.	 Should unavoidable conflicts occur that affect finish ceiling and soffit heights, methods of installations, methods of construction or means of accessibility, the contractor shall clearly identify each location for review by the Architect.

2.	 Equipment Rooms and Outdoor Service Yards: Show work above and below grade including mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical equipment, and related supports, accessories, and utility connections. Include the following information:

a.	 Equipment:	Show equipment and locations, utility connections, and working and service clearances.
b.	 Utilities: Show above and below grade utilities; indicate heights and below grade elevations, sizes of piping and conduit, dimensions between utilities and between utilities and other obstructions including concrete footings for other work. Show locations of all shut-off and isolation valves, cleanouts, filters, and other devices requiring human access for maintenance and repair.
c.	 Enclosures: Show limits of enclosure including walls, doors, fences, and gates; confirm door and gate access width for equipment.
d.	 Dimensions:	Indicate dimensions as appropriate to insure adequate clearance will be provided for installation, service, and operation of equipment; include horizontal and vertical dimensions between utilities to insure clearance for installation of utilities. Include vertical dimension(s) of equipment and distances to overhead obstructions where applicable.

3.	 Roof Mounted Equipment: Show equipment that will be located on the roof, include the following:

a.	Equipment locations and horizontal distances between equipment.
b.	 Locations of roof penetrations, sizes of penetrations, and indicate the horizontal distance between penetrations and roof mounted equipment.
c.	Pipe and conduit runs including locations and type(s) of supports.
d.	 Distance between all roof mounted equipment and roof drainage features. Equipment shall be located so as to not obstruct roof drainage; provide at least 24 inches between equipment platforms and valleys formed by the intersection of roof planes and crickets.

4.	 Underground Site Utilities and Utilities Below Slabs on Grade within Building Areas:	Where underground utilities cross other utilities, penetrate footings, underground structures or other obstructions; show the work that will be placed underground; include the following information:

2023-06	PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION	013113	4 of 6

a.	Indicate types and sizes of utility piping and elevations below grade.
b.	 Show footings and other underground structures; where unavoidable conflicts occur between underground structures/footings and utilities, indicate depths below grade and clearly identify locations for sleeving for review by Architect.

C.	 Preparation:	Prepare coordination drawings electronically using same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the Architect’s original Drawings (DWG files).

1.	Submittal Format:

a.	 Electronic Format: Submit electronic drawing files using Portable Data File (PDF) format.
b.	 Printed Format: Submit plotted drawings on opaque bond paper not of at least 8.5 inches by 11 inches and not larger than 24 inches by 36 inches.

2.	Architect will furnish Contractor digital data files of base drawings as appropriate for use in preparing coordination digital data files.

a.	Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to the Drawings.
b.	 Digital Data Software Program:	The Drawings are available in DWG format.
c.	 Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of an Agreement form acceptable to the Owner and Architect.

D.	 Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are the Contractor's responsibility. If the Architect determines that the coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, the Architect will so inform the Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS

A.	 Examination of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to examine both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

3.2	CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A.	 Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling and installation.	Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

2023-06	PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION	013113	5 of 6

B.	 Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period.

C.	 Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION	013113	6 of 6

SECTION 013119 PROJECT MEETINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	 Section includes administrative provisions for project meetings, including, but not limited to, the following:

1.	Preconstruction conferences. 2.	Preinstallation conferences. 3.	Progress meetings.
4.	Project Closeout Conference.

B.	Related sections include but are not limited to the following:

1.	Division 01 Sections as applicable to project management.

1.3	PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A.	 Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction at the project site, at a time convenient to the Owner and the Architect, but no later than 14 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at the Project Site or another convenient location.	Owner and Architect to conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

B.	Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Architect, and their consultants; the Contractor and its superintendent; and major subcontractors, suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

C.	Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including but not limited to the following:

1.	Tentative construction schedule.
2.	Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. 3.	Designation of key personnel and their duties. 4.	Lines of communication.
5.	Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. 6.	Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
7.	Procedures for RFI’s.

2023-06	PROJECT MEETINGS	013119 - 1 of 4

8.	Procedures for testing and inspection. 9.	Distribution of Contract Documents. 10.	Submittal procedures.
11.	Preparation of record documents. 12.	Use of the premises.
13.	Work restrictions and working hours. 14.	Temporary facilities and controls. 15.	Parking availability.
16.	Office, work, and storage areas. 17.	Equipment deliveries and priorities. 18.	Safety procedures and first aid.
19.	Security.
20.	Housekeeping.
21.	County alcohol, drug and tobacco policy.

1.4	PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES

A.	Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at the Project Site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

B.	Attendees: The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation, and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise the Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

1.	Agenda: Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration at each preinstallation conference, including requirements for the following:

a.	Contract Documents. b.	Options.
c.	Related RFI’s, Proposal Requests, and Change Orders. d.	Purchases.
e.	Deliveries. f.	Submittals.
g.	Possible conflicts.
h.	Compatibility problems. i.	Time schedules.
j.	Weather limitations.
k.	Manufacturer's written instructions. l.	Warranty requirements.
m.	Compatibility of materials. n.	Acceptability of substrates. o.	Temporary facilities.
p.	Space and access limitations.
q.	Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. r.	Safety.
s.	Testing and ionspecting requirements. t.	Required performance results.
u.	Recording requirements.

2023-06	PROJECT MEETINGS	013119 - 2 of 4

v.	Protection.

2.	Record	significant conference discussions, agreements,	disagreements, including corrective measures and actions.
3.	Promptly distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information, including the Owner and the Architect.
4.	 Do not proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date.

1.5	PROGRESS MEETINGS

A.	Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at the Project Site at regular intervals to be established by the Architect, Contractor, and Owner.

1.	Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of the payment request.

B.	Attendees:	In addition to representatives of the Owner and Architect, each subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

C.	Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress.	Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the Project. Review proposed percentages of work completed for current months progress payment.

1.	Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule.	Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
2.	Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

a.	Interface requirements. b.	Sequence of operation. c.	Status of submittals.
d.	Deliveries.
e.	Off-site fabrication. f.	Access.
g.	Site utilization.
h.	Temporary facilities and services.
i.	Status of correction of deficient items. j.	Field observations.
k.	Status of RFI’s, Proposal Requests, and Change Orders. l.	Progress cleaning.
m.	Quality and work standards.

2023-06	PROJECT MEETINGS	013119 - 3 of 4

n.	Documentation of information for payment requests. o.	Request for Information

D.	 Schedule Updating: Revise the Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule to the Owner, the Architect, and all other parties involved in the project. Failure to revise and keep current the Contractor’s construction schedule may be grounds for returning Application for Payment unreviewed.

1.6	PROJECT CLOSEOUT CONFERENCE

A.	Project Closeout Conference: Conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but not less than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.

B.	Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

C.	Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:

1.	Preparation of record documents.
2.	Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance.
3.	Submittal of written warranties.
4.	Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.
5.	Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. 6.	Requirements for demonstration and training.
7.	Preparation of Contractor's punch list.
8.	Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment.
9.	Submittal procedures.
10.	Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

PART 3 – EXECUTION

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

END OF SECTION

2023-06	PROJECT MEETINGS	013119 - 4 of 4

SECTION 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A.	 Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1.	Startup construction schedule.
2.	Contractor's construction schedule (CPM). 3.	Daily construction reports.
4.	Special reports.

B.	Related Sections include but are not limited to the following:

1.	Division 01 Section “Photographic Documentation.”
2.	Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 3.	Division 01 Section "Quality and Testing Requirements" for submitting a schedule
of tests and inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A.	Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1.	 Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.
2.	 Predecessor Activity: An activity that must be started or completed before another given activity can be started.
3.	 Successor Activity: An activity that cannot be started until the completion of another given activity.

B.	 Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Architect.

C.	 CPM:	Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

2023 06	CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION	013200 -	of 9

D.	 Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

E.	Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

F.	Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1.	 Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
2.	 Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.
3.	 Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

G.	 Milestone: An activity, which occurs in an instant and thus has no time duration, a key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.

H.	 Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A.	Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1.	Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. 2.	PDF electronic file.
3.	Two paper copies.

B.	Preliminary construction schedule.

1.	Approval of cost-loaded, preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.

C.	 Startup Network Diagram:	Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities.

D.	 Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.

1.	 Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label.

E.	 CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days.

2023 06	CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION	013200 -	of 9

1.	Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.
2.	 Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.
3.	Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
4.	 Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed until most recent Application for Payment.

F.	Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

G.	Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

H.	Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.	 Prescheduling Conference:	Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:

1.	Review software limitations and content and format for reports.
2.	Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3.	Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.
4.	Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 5.	Review submittal requirements and procedures.
6.	Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.
7.	 Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies.
8.	Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures. 9.	Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 10.	Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.6 COORDINATION

A.	 Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

B.	 Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1.	 Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.
2.	 Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

2023 06	CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION	013200 -	of 9

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A.	 Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of final completion.

1.	 Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B.	Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1.	Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.
2.	 Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
3.	 Submittal Review Time:	Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.
4.	Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing. 5.	Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for completion,
and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of completion.
6.	 Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion.

C.	 Constraints:	Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1.	Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
2.	 Work by Owner:	Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner.
3.	 Products Ordered in Advance:	Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.
4.	 Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.
5.	Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a.	Coordination with existing construction. b.	Limitations of continued occupancies. c.	Uninterruptible services.
d.	Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e.	Use of premises restrictions.
f.	Provisions for future construction.

2023 06	CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION	013200 -	of 9

g.	Seasonal variations. h.	Environmental control.

6.	 Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:

a.	Submittals. b.	Purchases. c.	Mockups. d.	Fabrication.
e.	Sample testing. f.	Deliveries.
g.	Installation.
h.	Tests and inspections. i.	Adjusting.
j.	Curing.
k.	Startup and placement into final use and operation.

7.	 Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:

a.	Structural completion.
b.	Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. c.	Permanent space enclosure.
d.	Completion of mechanical installation. e.	Completion of electrical installation.
f.	Substantial Completion.

D.	 Milestones:	Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.

E.	 Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.

F.	 Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update.	Summarize the following issues:

1.	Unresolved issues.
2.	Unanswered Requests for Information. 3.	Rejected or unreturned submittals.
4.	Notations on returned submittals.
5.	Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

G.	 Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule.

2023 06	CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION	013200 -	of 9

Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.

H.	 Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)

A.	General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.

B.	 Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

C.	 CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.

1.	 Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed.

a.	 Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.

2.	 Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information.
3.	 Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.
4.	 Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time.

D.	 CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work.	Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.

1.	Activities:	Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities:

a.	Preparation and processing of submittals. b.	Mobilization and demobilization.
c.	Purchase of materials. d.	Delivery.
e.	Fabrication.
f.	Utility interruptions.

2023 06	CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION	013200 -	of 9

g.	Installation.
h.	Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i.	Testing and commissioning.
j.	Punch list and final completion.
k.	Activities occurring following final completion.

2.	 Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates.
3.	 Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.
4.	 Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges.

a.	 Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path.

E.	 Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.

F.	 Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:

1.	Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2.	Description of activity.
3.	Main events of activity.
4.	Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5.	Early and late start dates.
6.	Early and late finish dates.
7.	Activity duration in workdays. 8.	Total float or slack time.
9.	Average size of workforce.

G.	 Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following:

1.	Identification of activities that have changed. 2.	Changes in early and late start dates.
3.	Changes in early and late finish dates.
4.	Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5.	Changes in the critical path.
6.	Changes in total float or slack time. 7.	Changes in the Contract Time.

H.	Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates.

2023 06	CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION	013200 -	of 9

1.	 In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value.
2.	 In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value.
3.	 In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date.
4.	 Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings.

a.	 In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative value completed" with total at bottom.
b.	 Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

2.3 REPORTS

A.	 Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1.	List of subcontractors at Project site.
2.	List of separate contractors at Project site.
3.	Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4.	Equipment at Project site.
5.	Material deliveries.
6.	 High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow.
7.	Accidents.
8.	Meetings and significant decisions. 9.	Unusual events (see special reports).
10.	Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11.	Meter readings and similar recordings.
12.	Emergency procedures.
13.	Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14.	Change Orders received and implemented.
15.	Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16.	Services connected and disconnected.
17.	Equipment or system tests and startups. 18.	Partial completions and occupancies. 19.	Substantial Completions authorized.

2.4 SPECIAL REPORTS

A.	 Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.

2023 06	CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION	013200 -	of 9

1.	 Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B.	 Field Condition Reports:	Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information.     Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A.	 Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At progress meetings, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1.	 Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.
2.	 Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3.	As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

B.	 Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1.	Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2.	 When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.

END OF SECTION

2023 06	CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION	013200 -	of 9

SECTION 013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1.	Preconstruction photographs.
2.	Periodic construction photographs.

B.	Related Sections:

1.	Division 01 Section “Project Meetings.”
2.	 Division 02 Section "Selective Demolition" for photographic documentation before building demolition operations commence.
3.	 Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for photographic documentation before site clearing operations commence.

1.3	SUBMITTALS

A.	Digital Photographs: Submit image files at regularly scheduled progress meetings.

1.	 Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1	PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A.	 Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels.

2023-06	PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION	013233 1 of 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A.	 General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.

1.	 Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location.

B.	 Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

1.	Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.
2.	 Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect.

C.	 Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of excavation, commencement of demolition, or starting construction, take photographs of Project site and surrounding area, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points as necessary to document preconstruction conditions.

1.	 Take not less than 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to Project area before starting the Work.
2.	 Take not less than 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction.
3.	 Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent structures, pavements, and improvements.

D.	 Periodic Construction Photographs: Take not less than 20 photographs bi-weekly, with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION	013233 2 of 2

SECTION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	 Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B.	Related Sections:

1.	 Division 01 Section “Payment Procedures” for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values.
2.	 Division 01 Section “Construction Progress Documentation” for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor’s construction schedule.
3.	 Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data” for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.
4.	 Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents” for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.
5.	 Division 01 Section “Demonstration and Training” for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner’s personnel.

1.3	SUBMITTALS

A.	 Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1.	 Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor’s construction schedule.
2.	 Initial Submittal:	Submit concurrently with start-up construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.
3.	 Final Submittal:	Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor’s construction schedule.

2023-06	SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES	013300 - 1 of 11

a.	 Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

4.	Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a.	Scheduled date for first submittal.
b.	Specification Section number and title. c.	Name of subcontractor.
d.	Description of the Work covered.
e.	Scheduled date for Architect’s final release or approval. f.	Scheduled dates for purchasing.
g.	Scheduled dates for installation. h.	Activity or event number.

1.4	SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A.	 General Requirements: Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor.

1.	Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor’s approval stamp and will return them without action.

B.	Architect’s Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor’s use in preparing submittals.

C.	 Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1.	 Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2.	 Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
3.	 Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
4.	 Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a.	Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

D.	 Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect’s receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1.       Initial Review: Allow 14 calendar days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect

2023-06	SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES	013300 - 2 of 11

will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2.	 Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.
3.	Resubmittal Review: Allow 14 calendar days for review of each resubmittal.
4.	 Sequential Review:	Where sequential review of submittals by Architect’s consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 calendar days for initial review of each submittal.
5.	 Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect’s consultants, allow 14 calendar days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.

E.	 Digital Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification.

1.       Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2.       Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block for
Architect’s review stamp and approval markings.
3.	 Provide a space approximately 2 by 3 inches on label or beside title block for Contractor’s review stamp and approval markings.
4.	Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a.	Project name. b.	Date.
c.	Name of Architect. d.	Name of Contractor.
e.	Name of subcontractor. f.	Name of supplier.
g.	Name of manufacturer.
h.	Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1)	 Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

i.	Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j.	Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k.	Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l.	Other necessary identification.

5.	Submit one copy of a digital submittal to reviewer in addition to paper submittal.

F.	 Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification.

1.       Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2.       Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block for
Architect’s review stamp and approval markings.

2023-06	SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES	013300 - 3 of 11

3.	 Provide a space approximately 2 by 3 inches on label or beside title block for Contractor’s review stamp and approval markings.
4.	Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a.	Project name. b.	Date.
c.	Name of Architect. d.	Name of Contractor.
e.	Name of subcontractor. f.	Name of supplier.
g.	Name of manufacturer.
h.	Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1)	 Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

i.	Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j.	Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k.	Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l.	Other necessary identification.

5.	 Transmittal:	Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form.

a.	Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:

1)	Project name. 2)	Date.
3)	Destination (To:). 4)	Source (From:).
5)	Name of Contractor.
6)	Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
7)	Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 8)	Category and type of submittal.
9)	Submittal purpose and description. 10)	Specification Section number and title. 11)	Indication of full or partial submittal.
12)	Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 13)	Transmittal number
14)	Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 15)	Remarks.
16)	Signature of transmitter.

b.	 On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor’s letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

2023-06	SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES	013300 - 4 of 11

G.	Product Options:

1.	Clearly identify product options required to comply with the Contract Documents. 2.	Clearly identify product options requiring selection by the Architect.

H.	 Deviations: Clearly identify deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents including minor variations and limitations.

I.	 Resubmittals:	Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1.	Note date and content of previous submittal.
2.	 Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.
3.	 Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect’s action stamp.

J.	 Distribution:	Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

K.	 Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect’s action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1	SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A.	 General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1.	 Contractor will submit digital or paper copies of the submittal to be reviewed by Architect, Owner, and/or one of the Architect’s consultant; unless specifically indicated otherwise.

a.	 One (1) digital copy to be submitted by e-mail, digital transfer, CD, or memory disk. Architect will verify receipt of submittal. If no verification of receipt has been provided within two (2) calendars, contractor shall make request for verification to architect.
b.	 Six (6) paper copies to be physically delivered to the architect. One (1) will be retained by Architect, Owner, and Architect’s consultant. Three (3) or four(4) copies will be returned to the contractor depending if review is required by Architect’s consultant.
c.	 Submittals requiring deferred approval must be submitted by paper copies only.

2.	 Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals:	Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section “Closeout Procedures.”

2023-06	SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES	013300 - 5 of 11

3.	 Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification.	Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
4.	 Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B.	 Product Data:	Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1.	 If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2.	 Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3.	Include the following information, as applicable:

a.	Manufacturer’s catalog cuts.
b.	Manufacturer’s product specifications. c.	Standard color charts.
d.	Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e.	Testing by recognized testing agency.
f.	Application of testing agency labels and seals. g.	Notation of coordination requirements.
h.	Availability and delivery time information.

4.	For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a.	Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b.	Printed performance curves.
c.	Operational range diagrams.
d.	 Clearances	required to	other construction, if	not	indicated	on accompanying Shop Drawings.

5.	Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6.	Submit Product Data in the following format:

a.	 One (1) digital copy to be submitted by e-mail, digital transfer, CD, or memory disk.
b.	Six (6) paper copies physically delivered to the architect.
c.	 Product data requiring deferred approval must be submitted by paper copies only.

C.	 Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1.	 Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a.	Identification of products.

2023-06	SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES	013300 - 6 of 11

b.	Schedules.
c.	Compliance with specified standards. d.	Notation of coordination requirements.
e.	Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f.	Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g.	Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2.	 Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

3.	Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:

a.	 One (1) digital copy to be submitted by e-mail, digital transfer, CD, or memory disk.
b.	Six (6) opaque paper copies physically delivered to the architect.
c.	 Product data requiring deferred approval must be submitted by paper copies only.

D.	 Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1.	 Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.
2.	 Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a.	Generic description of Sample.
b.	Product name and name of manufacturer. c.	Sample source.
d.	Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
e.	Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3.	 Disposition: Maintain sets of reviewed Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a.	 Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.
b.	 Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner’s property, are the property of Contractor.

4.	 Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a.       Number of Samples: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from

2023-06	SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES	013300 - 7 of 11

manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

5.	 Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a.	 Number of Samples: Submit 3 sets of Samples. Architect will retain 2 Sample sets; remainder will be returned.

1)	 Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.
2)	 If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E.	 Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1.	Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product.
2.	Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3.	Number and name of room or space.
4.	Location within room or space.
5.	Submit product schedule in the following format:

a.	 One (1) digital copy to be submitted by e-mail, digital transfer, CD, or memory disk.
b.	 Three (3) paper copies physically delivered to the architect. Architect will return one (1) copy.

F.	 Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

G.	 Contractor’s Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section “Construction Progress Documentation.”

H.	Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section “Payment Procedures.”

I.	 Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

J.	 Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

2023-06	SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES	013300 - 8 of 11

K.	 Maintenance Data:	Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

L.	 Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

M.	 Welding Certificates:	Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on American Welding Society (AWS) forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

N.	 Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

O.	 Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

P.	 Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q.	 Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

R.	 Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency’s standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

S.	 Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

T.	 Research Reports:	Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1.	Name of evaluation organization. 2.	Date of evaluation.
3.	Time period when report is in effect. 4.	Product and manufacturers’ names. 5.	Description of product.
6.	Test procedures and results. 7.	Limitations of use.

U.      Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency’s standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed

2023-06	SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES	013300 - 9 of 11

before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

V.	 Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency’s standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

W.	 Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

X.	 Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

2.2	DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A.	 Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1.	 If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B.	 Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit 1 digital copy and 6 paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1.	 Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	CONTRACTOR’S REVIEW

A.	 Product Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B.	 Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals:	Refer to requirements in Division 01 Section “Closeout Procedures.”

2023-06	SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES	013300 - 10 of 11

C.	Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor’s approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2	ARCHITECT’S ACTION

A.	 General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor’s approval stamp and will return them without action.

B.	 Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action as follows:

1.	 Reviewed: Final unrestricted release, work may proceed, provided it complies with contract documents.

2.	 Furnish as Corrected: Final but restricted release, work may proceed, provided written confirmation is delivered to Architect by Contractor that installed work complied with notations and corrections on submittal and with contract documents.

3.	 Revise and Resubmit: Returned for resubmittal, do not proceed with work. Revise submittal in accordance with notations thereon, and resubmit without delay to obtain an acceptable action marking. Do not allow submittals with this marking (or unmarked submittals where a marking is required) to be used in connection with performance of the Work.

4.	 Rejected: Returned for resubmittal, do not proceed with work. Revise submittal in accordance with notations thereon, and resubmit without delay to obtain an acceptable action marking.	Do not allow submittals with this marking (or unmarked submittals where a marking is required) to be used in connection with performance of the Work.

C.	 Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.

D.	 Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.

E.	 Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES	013300 - 11 of 11

SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	 Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.

B.	Related Requirements:

1.	 Division 01 Section "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.
2.	Division 07 Sections as applicable to roofing for temporary roofing requirements. 3.	Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of asphalt
pavement for temporary roads and paved areas.
4.	 Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for construction and maintenance of cement concrete pavement for temporary roads and paved areas.
5.	 Division 31 through 33 Sections as applicable for temporary erosion and sedimentation control.

1.3	USE CHARGES

A.	 General:	Installation, removal, and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B.	 Water Water Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use; provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

1.	 Water service is available for use without payment of use charge. Provide temporary water meter for Owner to track the usage.

C.	 Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use; provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

1.	 Electric power service is available for use without payment of use charges. Provide temporary electric power meter for Owner to track the usage.

2023-06	TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS	015000 1 of 11

1.4	SUBMITTALS

A.	 Fire-Safety Program:	Show compliance authorities having jurisdiction.	Indicate management of fire-prevention program.

1.5	QUALITY ASSURANCE

with requirements of NFPA 241 and Contractor personnel responsible for

A.	 Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B.	 Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

C.	 Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following:

1.	Governing code requirements. 2.	Health and safety regulations. 3.	Utility company regulations.
4.	Police, fire department, and rescue squad rules. 5.	Environmental protection regulations.
6.	 Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and	Demolition	Operations,"	ANSI A10	Series	standards	for	"Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition," and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities."

1.6	PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.	 Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

B.	 Conditions of Use:	Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the Work progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1	MATERIALS

A.	 Portable Chain-Link Fencing:	Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts. Provide concrete or galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts.

2023-06	TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS	015000 2 of 11

B.	 Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.

C.	 Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats:	Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches.

D.	 Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

2.2	TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A.	 Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.

1.	Store combustible materials apart from building.

2.3	EQUIPMENT

A.	 Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

1.	 Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure.

B.	 Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained, single-occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated recirculation type at each of the project sites. Provide units properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. Use of Owner’s toilet facilities is not permitted.

C.	 HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1.	 Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.
2.	 Heating Units:	Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL, FM, or another recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed.
3.	 Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction.

2023-06	TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS	015000 3 of 11

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A.	 Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

B.	 Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2	TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A.	General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1.	Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B.	Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1.	 Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C.	 Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction.

1.	 Existing Water Service:	Where Owner’s existing water service is available, connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

D.	 Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

1.	Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will not be permitted.

E.	 Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity.	Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

F.	 Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas.

1.	 Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed according to coordination drawings.

2023-06	TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS	015000 4 of 11

a.	 Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas.
b.	 Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air-filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete.

2.	 Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust-producing equipment.	Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust-containment devices.
3.	 Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-equipped vacuum equipment.

G.	 Ventilation and Humidity Control:	Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

1.	 Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.

H.	 Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.

1.	Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated.
2.	 Existing Electric Power Service:	Where Owner’s existing power service is available, connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.

I.	 Lighting:	Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1.	 Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

J.	Telephone Service:

1.	Provide superintendent with cellular telephone.

3.3	SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A.	 General: Locate storage containers, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access in the areas designated and approved by the Architect and Owner. Comply with the following:

1.	Do not locate temporary offices, shops, and sheds within 30 feet of building lines.

2023-06	TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS	015000 5 of 11

2.	 Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B.	 Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated on Drawings.

1.	 Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust.

C.	 Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.

1.	 Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas.
2.	 Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3.	 Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing.
4.	 Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final course according to Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving."

D.	Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.	 Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2.	Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

E.	Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.

1.	 Where applicable, designated areas of Owner's existing parking may be used for construction personnel when indicated on Drawings.

F.	 Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1.	 Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

G.	 Project Signs:	Provide Project signs as indicated.	Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1.	 Identification Signs:	Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.

2023-06	TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS	015000 6 of 11

2.	 Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project.

a.	Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3.	Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

H.	 Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

I.	 Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Division 01 Section "Execution."

1.	 Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily.	Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully.

J.	Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1.	 Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

K.	Use of Elevators: Use of elevators is not permitted.

L.	 Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate.

A.	Stair Usage:

1.	 Use of Owner's existing stairs may be permitted, subject to approval by Owner, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. Contractor’s use of stair shall not interfere with Owner’s continued use of stair and shall not create hazardous conditions for Owner’s use.	At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use.
2.	 Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion.
3.	 Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.

2023-06	TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS	015000 7 of 11

3.4	SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A.	 Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B.	 Environmental Protection:	Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1.	Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."

C.	 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

1.	 Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross tree or plant- protection zones.
2.	 Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
3.	 Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project.
4.	 Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

D.	 Stormwater Control:	Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.

E.	 Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.

F.	 Pest Control:	Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

G.	 Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.

1.	 Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations.

a.       Enclosure fence shall be installed in a manner that will provide continuous coverage to prevent non-authorized people from entering the Fresno

2023-06	TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS	015000 8 of 11

Chaffee Zoo facility. Any portion removed from the facility’s existing perimeter fence in order to accommodate the construction work shall be protected with the temporary site enclosure fence or the construction of a new permanent fence.

2.	 Site Security:	Fence and entrance gates shall remain closed and secure throughout the entirety of scheduled construction. Entering the construction site shall be limited to Owner, Facility Staff, Contractor, and Sub-Contractors performing their scope of work during hours of operation.

a.	 When entering and exiting occurs during the construction, an attendant must be present at all times supervising the entrance gate. Otherwise, the gate must remain closed and secured.

3.	All fencing shall be lockable and shall be locked nightly.

H.	 Security Enclosure and Lockup:	Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

I.	 Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights:	Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

J.	 Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

K.	 Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1.	 Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures.

L.	 Temporary Fire Protection and Safety: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses.

1.	Comply with the following:

a.	NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program. b.	California Building Code.
c.	California Fire Code.

2.	Prohibit smoking in construction areas.
3.	 Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
4.       Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish

2023-06	TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS	015000 9 of 11

procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
5.	 Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
6.	 Impairment of Fire Protection Systems:	Impairments to any fire protection system shall be in accordance with the California Fire Code, Section 901.

3.5	MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A.	 General: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B.	 Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:

1.	Protect porous materials from water damage.
2.	Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.
3.	 Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.
4.	Remove standing water from decks.
5.	Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

C.	 Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1.	 Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.
2.	Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.
3.	 Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.
4.	Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5.	Do not install material that is wet.
6.	Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
7.	 Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

D.	 Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1.	 Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.
2.	Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.
3.	 Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits.

2023-06	TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS	015000 10 of 11

a.	 Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective.
b.	 Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation.	Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.
c.	 Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48hours.

3.6	OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A.	 Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B.	Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1.	 Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C.	 Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D.	 Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion.	Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.	 Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2.	 Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.	At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION

2023-06	TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS	015000 11 of 11

SECTION 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	 Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.

B.	Related Requirements:

1.	Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.

1.3	DEFINITIONS

A.	 Products:	Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1.	 Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, which is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2.	 New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.
3.	 Comparable Product:	Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B.	 Basis-of-Design Specification:	A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.

2023-06	PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS	016000 1 of 5

1.4	SUBMITTALS

A.	 Comparable Product Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1.	 Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article.
2.	Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a.	 Form of Approval:	As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."
b.	 Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.

B.       Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal:      Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.

1.5	QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.	 Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.6	PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.	 Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism.	Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B.	Delivery and Handling:

1.	 Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.
2.	 Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
3.	 Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4.	 Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

2023-06	PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS	016000 2 of 5

C.	Storage:

1.	 Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2.	Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3.	 Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4.	 Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.
5.	 Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
6.	Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

1.7	PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A.	 Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.       Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2.	 Special Warranty:	Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B.	 Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.

1.	 Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.
2.	 Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.
3.	 See Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C.	 Warranty Submittals:	Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

2023-06	PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS	016000 3 of 5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1	PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A.	 General Product Requirements:	Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1.	 Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2.	 Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3.	 Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
4.	 Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.
5.	 Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.
6.	 Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B.	Product Selection Procedures:

1.	 Restricted List:	Where Specifications include the phrase or similar phrase “provide one of the following,” and lists 2 or more manufacturers and/or products, provide one of the products indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer or product.
2.	 Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include the phrase or similar phrase “includes, but are not limited to the following” provide one of the products or products by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements.	Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
3.	 Basis of Design: Where Specifications include the phrase “Basis of Design” and names a manufacturer and product, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers named as having comparable products.	Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for consideration of products by an unnamed manufacturer.

2023-06	PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS	016000 4 of 5

C.	 Visual Matching Specification:	Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1.	 If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

D.	 Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements.	Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2	COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A.	 Conditions for Consideration:	Architect will consider Contractor's request for a comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied.	If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1.	 Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2.	 Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications.	Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3.	Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4.	 List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5.	Samples, if requested.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	PRODUCT INSTALLATION

A.	 General: Install products in accordance with Drawings, Specifications, and product manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Installation shall include examination of conditions and preparations necessary for proper installation.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS	016000 5 of 5

SECTION 017300 EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	 Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1.	Construction layout.
2.	Field engineering and surveying. 3.	Installation of the Work.
4.	Cutting and patching.
5.	Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6.	Progress cleaning.
7.	Starting and adjusting.
8.	Protection of installed construction. 9.	Correction of the Work.

B.	Related Requirements:

1.	Division 01 Section "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.
2.	 Division 02 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building.
3.	 Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction.

1.3	DEFINITIONS

A.	 Cutting:	Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.

B.	 Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.

1.4	SUBMITTALS

A.	 Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

2023-06	EXECUTION	017300 1 of 10

B.	Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by professional engineer.

C.	 Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.

1.5	QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.	 Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

B.	 Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1.	 Structural Elements: When cutting of structural elements must be performed, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding.	Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection.

2.	 Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:

a.	Primary operational systems and equipment. b.	Fire separation assemblies.
c.	Air or smoke barriers.
d.	Fire-suppression systems.
e.	Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f.	Control systems.
g.	Communication systems.
h.	Fire-detection and alarm systems. i.	Conveying systems.
j.	Electrical wiring systems.
k.	Operating systems of special construction.

3.	 Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.	Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

a.	Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b.	Membranes and flashings.
c.	Sprayed fire-resistive material. d.	Equipment supports.
e.	Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.

2023-06	EXECUTION	017300 2 of 10

4.	 Visual Elements: Cut and patch construction in a manner that results in no visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

C.	 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1	MATERIALS

A.	General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B.	 In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1.	 If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	EXAMINATION

A.	 Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting the Work.

1.	 Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.
2.	 Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B.	 Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1.	 Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.
2.	 Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

2023-06	EXECUTION	017300 3 of 10

3.	 Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

C.	 Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

1.	Description of the Work.
2.	List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3.	List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
4.	Recommended corrections.

D.	 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2	PREPARATION

A.	 Existing Utility Information:	Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B.	 Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C.	 Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D.	 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Request for Information."

3.3	CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A.	 Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B.	 General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1.	 Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2.	Establish limits on use of Project site.
3.	 Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions.

2023-06	EXECUTION	017300 4 of 10

4.	Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
5.	 Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
6.	 Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.
7.	 Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction.

C.	 Site Improvements:	Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D.	 Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E.	 Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.

3.4	FIELD ENGINEERING

A.	 Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work.	Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

1.	 Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding.
2.	 Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.
3.	 Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
4.	 Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

B.	 Certified Survey: On completion of site drainage features, foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.

C.	 Final Property Survey: Engage a professional engineer to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by professional engineer, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.

2023-06	EXECUTION	017300 5 of 10

1.	 Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.

3.5	INSTALLATION

A.	 General:	Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1.	Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2.	 Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.
3.	Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
4.	 Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces.

B.	 Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C.	 Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.	Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D.	 Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E.	 Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F.	 Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G.	 Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H.	Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.	Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1.	 Mounting Heights:	Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.
2.	Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3.	 Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

2023-06	EXECUTION	017300 6 of 10

I.	 Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J.	 Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.6	CUTTING AND PATCHING

A.	 Cutting and Patching, General:	Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1.	 Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B.	 Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C.	Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D.	 Protection:	Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E.	Adjacent Occupied Areas:	Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Summary."

F.	 Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems:	Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

G.	 Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1.	 In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2.	 Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3.	 Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.
4.	 Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.

2023-06	EXECUTION	017300 7 of 10

5.	 Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6.	 Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H.	 Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1.	 Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
2.	 Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

a.	 Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.
b.	Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3.	 Floors and Walls:	Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space.	Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a.	 Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch.	Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4.	 Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.
5.	 Exterior Building Enclosure:	Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

I.        Cleaning:     Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.7	OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A.	Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.

B.	 Coordination:	Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel.

2023-06	EXECUTION	017300 8 of 10

1.	 Construction Schedule:	Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.
2.	 Preinstallation Conferences:	Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work.	Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.8	PROGRESS CLEANING

A.	 General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1.	 Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.
2.	 Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3.	 Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.	Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a.	Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

B.	Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C.	 Work Areas:	Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1.	Remove liquid spills promptly.
2.	 Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.

D.	 Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E.	 Concealed Spaces:	Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F.	 Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas:	Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G.	 Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

2023-06	EXECUTION	017300 9 of 10

H.	 During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I.	 Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period.	Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J.	 Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.9	STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A.	 Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements."

B.	 Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

C.	Adjust equipment for proper operation.	Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

D.	 Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E.	 Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.10	PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A.	 Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B.	Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	EXECUTION	017300 10 of 10

SECTION 017419
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1.	Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.

B.	Related Requirements:

1.	 Division 01 Section "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.
2.	 Division 04 Sections as applicable to masonry for disposal requirements for masonry waste.
3.	 Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements.

1.3	DEFINITIONS

A.	 Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B.	 Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C.	 Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D.	 Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

E.	 Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

F.	 Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.

2023-06                            CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT                 017419 - 1 of 9 AND DISPOSAL

1.4	PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.	 General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials including the following:

1.	Demolition Waste:

a.	Asphalt paving. b.	Concrete.
c.	Concrete reinforcing steel. d.	Brick.
e.	Concrete masonry units. f.	Wood studs.
g.	Wood joists.
h.	Plywood and oriented strand board. i.	Wood paneling.
j.	Wood trim.
k.	Structural and miscellaneous steel. l.	Rough hardware.
m.	Roofing. n.	Insulation.
o.	Doors and frames. p.	Door hardware.
q.	Windows. r.	Glazing.
s.	Metal studs.
t.	Gypsum board.
u.	Acoustical tile and panels. v.	Carpet.
w.	Carpet pad.
x.	Demountable partitions. y.	Equipment.
z.	Cabinets.
aa.	Plumbing fixtures. bb.	Piping.
cc.	Supports and hangers. dd.	Valves.
ee.	Sprinklers.
ff.	Mechanical equipment. gg.	Refrigerants.
hh.	Electrical conduit. ii.	Copper wiring.
jj.	Lighting fixtures. kk.	Lamps.
ll.	Ballasts.
mm. Electrical devices.
nn.	Switchgear and panelboards. oo.	Transformers.

2023-06                            CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT                 017419 - 2 of 9 AND DISPOSAL

2.	Construction Waste:

a.	Masonry and CMU. b.	Lumber.
c.	Wood sheet materials. d.	Wood trim.
e.	Metals. f.	Roofing.
g.	Insulation.
h.	Carpet and pad. i.	Gypsum board. j.	Piping.
k.	Electrical conduit.
l.	 Packaging:	Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials:

1)	Paper.
2)	Cardboard. 3)	Boxes.
4)	Plastic sheet and film. 5)	Polystyrene packaging. 6)	Wood crates.
7)	Plastic pails.

1.5	ACTION SUBMITTALS

A.	 Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

1.6	INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A.	 Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report.	Use Form CWM-7 for construction waste and Form CWM-8 for demolition waste (Form(s) included at the end of this Section). Include the following information:

1.	Material category.
2.	Generation point of waste.
3.	Total quantity of waste in tons.
4.	Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons. 5.	Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons.
6.	Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons.
7.	 Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.

B.	 Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work.

2023-06                            CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT                 017419 - 3 of 9 AND DISPOSAL

1.	 Recycle and/or salvage for reuse a minimum of 65 percent of the nonhazardous construction and demolition waste in accordance with CalGreen Section 5.408.1.1, 5.408.1.2 or 5.408.1.3; or meet a local construction and demolition waste management ordinance whichever is more stringent.

C.	 Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

D.	 Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

E.	 Recycling and Processing Facility Records:	Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

F.	 Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

G.	Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator.

H.	 Statement of Refrigerant Recovery:	Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.

1.7	QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.	 Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications:	Certified by EPA-approved certification program.

B.	 Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

C.	 Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:

1.	 Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste management coordinator.
2.	 Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition.
3.	 Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays.
4.	 Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities.
5.	Review waste management requirements for each trade.

2023-06                            CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT                 017419 - 4 of 9 AND DISPOSAL

1.8	WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A.	 General:	Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis.	Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A.	 General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.
1.	 Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B.	 Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work.
1.	 Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return.
2.	 Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

C.	 Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.	 Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
2.	 Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2	DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A.	 General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.	 Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.
2.	 Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

2023-06                            CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT                 017419 - 5 of 9 AND DISPOSAL

B.	Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C.	Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.3	ATTACHMENTS

A.	Form CWM-7 for construction waste

B.	Form CWM-8 for demolition waste.

2023-06                            CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT                 017419 - 6 of 9 AND DISPOSAL

2023-06
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 7 of 9

FORM CWM-7 CONSTRUCTION WASTE REDUCTION PROGRESS REPORT
		
MATERIAL CATEGORY
	GENERATION POINT
	TOT. QUAN. OF WASTE, TONS

(A)
	QUAN. OF WASTE SALVAGED
	QUAN. OF WASTE RECYCLED
	TOT. QUAN. OF WASTE RECOVERED, TONS

(D=B+C)
	TOT. QUAN. OF WASTE RECOVERED, (PERCENT)

(D/A x 100)
		
			EST. TONS
	ACTUAL TONS (B)
	EST. TONS
	ACTUAL TONS (C)
				
Packaging: Cardboard
										
Packaging: Boxes
										
Packaging: Plastic sheet/film
										
Packaging: Polystyrene
										
Packaging: Pallets or skids
										
Packaging: Crates
										
Packaging: Paint cans
										
Packaging: Plastic pails
										
Site Clearing Waste
										
Masonry or CMU
										
Lumber: Cut ofs
										
Lumber: Warped pieces
										
Plywood or OSB (scraps)
										
Wood Forms
										
Wood Waste Chutes
										
Wood Trim (Cut offs)
										
Metals
										
Insulation
										
Roofing
										
Joint Sealant Tubes
										
Gypsum Board (scraps)
										
Carpet and Pad (scraps)
										
Piping
										
Electrical Conduit
										
Other

										

2023-06
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 8 of 9

FORM CWM-8: DEMOLITION WASTE REDUCTION PROGRESS REPORT
		
MATERIAL CATEGORY
	GENERATION POINT
	TOT. QUAN. OF WASTE, TONS
	(A)	 
	QUAN. OF WASTE SALVAGED
	QUAN. OF WASTE RECYCLED
	TOT. QUAN. OF WASTE RECOVERED, TONS
	(D=B+C)	 
	TOT. QUAN. OF WASTE RECOVERED (PERCENT)
	(D/A x 100)     
		
			EST. TONS

	ACTUAL TONS (B)
	EST. TONS
	ACTUAL TONS (C)
				
AC Paving
										
Concrete
										
Brick
										
CMU
										
Lumber
										
Plywood and OSB
										
Wood Paneling
										
Wood Trim
										
Miscellaneous Metals
										
Structural Steel
										
Rough Hardware
										
Windows
										
Glazing
										
Acoustical Tile
										
Carpet
										
Carpet Pad
										
Demountable Partitions
										
Equipment
										
Cabinets
										
Plumbing Fixtures
										
Piping
										
Piping Supports and Hangers
										
Valves
										
Sprinklers
										
Mechanical Equipment
										
 Electrical Conduit	
 Copper Wiring	
 Light Fixtures	
 Lamps	

	

	

				

										
Lighting Ballasts
										
Electrical Devisces
										
 Switchgear and Panelboards 
 Transformers	
Other

									

END OF SECTION

2023-06                            CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT                 017419 - 9 of 9 AND DISPOSAL

SECTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	 Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1.	Closeout procedures at completion. 2.	Final cleaning.
3.	Repair of the Work.

B.	Related Requirements:

1.	 Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.
2.	Division 01 Section "Project Record Drawings" for submitting record Drawings. 3.	Division 01 Section "Warranties" for submitting final warranty information.
4.	 Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel.
5.	 Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.3	SUBMITTALS

A.	 Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Submit the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1.	 Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.	Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
2.	 Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record drawings, operation and maintenance manuals, warranties, and similar final record information.
3.	 Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

2023-06	CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES	017700 1 of 5

4.	 Submit	maintenance	material	submittals	specified	in	individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
5.	Submit test/adjust/balance records.
6.	 Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.

1.4	CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A.	 Procedures Prior to Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1.	Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
2.	 Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
3.	Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
4.	 Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
5.	 Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
6.	Advise Owner of changeover in utilities.
7.	 Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.
8.	Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
9.	 Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.

B.	 Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for inspection. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1.	Architect’s Punch List: During inspection, Architect will prepare a list of items needing completion or correction (punch list), a copy of the punch list will be distributed to the contractor and Owner.
2.	 Reinspection:	Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspection as incomplete is completed or corrected.
3.	 Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

C.	 Contractor’s Cost for Reinspection: Architect will perform one inspection and one reinspection at no additional cost to the Contractor. The expense for the Architect’s time for additional inspections will be paid by the Owner with the amount being deducted from the Contract Sum. The expense will be based on an hourly rate in

2023-06	CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES	017700 2 of 5

accordance with the Architect’s standard hourly rate schedule in effect at the time the work is performed with a minimum of $400.00 dollars for each additional reinspection.

D.	As-Built Grading Survey: After construction has been completed, submit a written request for the Civil Engineer obtained by the Owner to perform an As-Built Grading Survey as required by City of Fresno. Any additional As-Built Grading Survey required for corrected deficient work or incomplete work will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1	MATERIALS

A.	 Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	FINAL CLEANING

A.	 General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B.	 Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1.	 Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a.	 Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.
b.	 Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.
c.	 Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
d.	 Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.
e.	 Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances.	Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces.	Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

2023-06	CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES	017700 3 of 5

f.	 Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
g.	Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
h.	 Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.
i.	 Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.	Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
j.	Remove labels that are not permanent.
k.	 Wipe surfaces of mechanical, electrical, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.
l.	 Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.
m.	 Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters.	Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
n.	 Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.
o.	 Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
p.	Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C.	 Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3.2	REPAIR OF THE WORK

A.	 Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

1.	 Comply with requirements of Division 02 through 33 Sections as applicable to the Work to be restored and/or repaired.

B.	 Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements.	Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1.	 Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.
2.	 Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

2023-06	CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES	017700 4 of 5

a.	 Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3.	 Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.
4.	 Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES	017700 5 of 5

SECTION 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	 Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1.	Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2.	Emergency manuals.
3.	Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4.	Product maintenance manuals.
5.	Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.

B.	Related Sections:

1.	 Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.
2.	 Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for demonstration and training materials.
3.	 Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.3	DEFINITIONS

A.	 System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B.	Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

2023-06	OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA	017823 – 1 of 9

1.4	SUBMITTALS

A.	 Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual specification sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.	Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to modifications and field conditions.

1.	Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

a.	 3 paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return 2 copies.

2.	 Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training.	Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

3.	 Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.

a.	 Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1	OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A.	Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1.	List of documents. 2.	List of systems.
3.       List of equipment. 4.       Table of contents.

B.       List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C.	 List of Equipment:	List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D.	 Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

2023-06	OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA	017823 – 2 of 9

E.	 Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents.	If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2	 REQUIREMENTS	FOR	EMERGENCY,	OPERATION,	AND	MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A.	 Organization:	Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1.	Title page.
2.	Table of contents. 3.	Manual contents.

B.	Title Page: Include the following information:

1.	Subject matter included in manual. 2.	Name and address of Project.
3.	Name and address of Owner. 4.	Date of submittal.
5.	Name and contact information for Contractor.
6.	Name and contact information for Installer and/or Subcontractor. 7.	Name and contact information for Architect.
8.	 Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals.
9.	Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C.	 Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1.	 If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D.	 Manual Contents:	Organize into sets of manageable size.	Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment.	If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

2023-06	OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA	017823 – 3 of 9

E.	 Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1.	 Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a.	 If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components.	Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
b.	 Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2.	 Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.
3.	 Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.
4.	Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
5.	 Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a.	 If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.
b.	 If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.3	EMERGENCY MANUALS

A.	Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1.	Type of emergency.
2.       Emergency instructions. 3.       Emergency procedures.

B.	 Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1.	Fire. 2.	Flood.
3.	Gas leak.

2023-06	OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA	017823 – 4 of 9

4.	Water leak. 5.	Power failure.
6.	Water outage.
7.	System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8.	Chemical release or spill.

C.	 Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D.	Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1.	Instructions on stopping.
2.	Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3.	Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4.	Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5.	Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4	OPERATION MANUALS

A.	 Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1.	 System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
2.	Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3.	Operating standards.
4.	Operating procedures. 5.	Operating logs.
6.	Wiring diagrams. 7.	Control diagrams.
8.	Piped system diagrams.
9.	Precautions against improper use.
10.	License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B.	Descriptions: Include the following:

1.	 Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.
2.	Manufacturer's name.
3.	Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4.	Equipment function.
5.	Operating characteristics. 6.	Limiting conditions.
7.	Performance curves.
8.	Engineering data and tests.
9.	Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

2023-06	OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA	017823 – 5 of 9

C.	Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1.	Startup procedures.
2.	Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3.	Routine and normal operating instructions. 4.	Regulation and control procedures.
5.	Instructions on stopping.
6.	Normal shutdown instructions.
7.	Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8.	Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9.	Special operating instructions and procedures.

D.	 Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E.	 Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.5	PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A.	 Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.	Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B.	 Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C.	Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1.	Product name and model number. 2.	Manufacturer's name.
3.	Color, pattern, and texture.
4.	Material and chemical composition.
5.	Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D.	 Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1.	Inspection procedures.
2.	Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3.	List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4.	Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5.	Repair instructions.

E.	 Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

2023-06	OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA	017823 – 6 of 9

F.	 Warranties and Bonds:	Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1.	Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6	SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A.	 Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B.	 Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C.	 Manufacturers'	Maintenance	Documentation:	Manufacturers'	maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1.	Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2.	 Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3.	Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4.	List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D.	 Maintenance Procedures:	Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1.	Test and inspection instructions. 2.	Troubleshooting guide.
3.	Precautions against improper maintenance.
4.	 Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5.	Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6.	Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E.	 Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1.	 Scheduled Maintenance and Service:	Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
2.	 Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

2023-06	OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA	017823 – 7 of 9

F.	 Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with	parts	identified	and	cross-referenced	to	manufacturers'	maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G.	 Maintenance Service Contracts:	Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H.	 Warranties and Bonds:	Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1.	Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	MANUAL PREPARATION

A.	 Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B.	 Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

C.	 Product Maintenance Manual:	Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D.	 Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1.	 Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
2.	 Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E.	 Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1.	 Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

2023-06	OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA	017823 – 8 of 9

F.	 Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1.	 Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.
2.	 Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents."

G.	 Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA	017823 – 9 of 9

SECTION 017836 WARRANTIES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	 Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers’ standard warranties on products and special warranties.

B.	Related Sections include but are not limited to the following:

1.	 Division 02 through 33 Sections for specific warranty requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.3	DEFINITIONS

A.	 Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner.

B.	 Special project warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner.

1.4	WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS

A.	 Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.

B.	 Related Damages and Losses:	When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction, remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction.

2023-06	WARRANTIES	017836 - 1 of 3

C.	 Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.

D.	 Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.

E.	 Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law.	Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.

1.	 Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

F.	 Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.

1.5	SUBMITTALS

A.	 Warranties: Submit (2) copies of each required warranty properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1.	 Bind warranties in heavy-duty, commercial-quality, durable 3-ring, vinyl-covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

a.	 Provide a table of contents for the manual indicating specification section and title of warranty.
b.	 Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address, and telephone number of the Installer.
c.	 Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project title or name, and name of the Contractor.
d.	 Provide additional copies of each required warranty as necessary for inclusion in each operation and maintenance manual.

2023-06	WARRANTIES	017836 - 2 of 3

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

PART 3 – EXECUTION

(Not Used)

(Not Used)

END OF SECTION

2023-06	WARRANTIES	017836 - 3 of 3

SECTION 017839 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	 This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Drawings.

B.	Related Sections:

1.	Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
2.	 Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.
3.	 Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of the Work in those Sections.

1.3	CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A.	Record Drawings: Submit Record Drawings as follows:

1. Initial Submittal:

a. Submit one paper-copy set of marked-up record prints.

1)	Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

2. Final Submittal:

a. Submit one paper-copy set of marked-up record prints.
b. Submit PDF electronic files of scanned Record Drawings and one set of plots from PDF files.
c. Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded.

2023-06	PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS	017839 – 1 of 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1	RECORD DRAWINGS

A.	 Record Prints:	Record Print sets shall include all drawings of the construction documents including original project Drawings, Shop Drawings, Supplemental Drawings, Coordination Drawings, Clarification Drawings, Change Orders, and similar drawings. Record Print sets shall include all drawings of contract documents whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of Record Prints.

1.	 Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up Record Prints.

a.	 Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b.	Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c.	Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
d.	Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
e.	 Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation.

2.	 Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a.	Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b.	Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c.	Depths of foundations below first floor.
d.	Locations and depths of underground utilities. e.	Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
f.	Revisions to electrical circuitry. g.	Actual equipment locations.
h.	Duct size and routing.
i.	Locations of concealed internal utilities.
j.	Changes made by Change Order or Change Directive. k.	Changes made following Architect's written orders.
l.	Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
m.	Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
n.	Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3.	 Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.
4.	 Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil.	Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

2023-06	PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS	017839 – 2 of 3

5.	 Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.
6.	 Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B.	 Newly Prepared Record Drawings:	Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.

1.	 New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification.
2.	 Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

C.	 Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1.	 Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
2.	Identification: As follows:

a.	Project name. b.	Date.
c.	Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d.	Name of Architect.
e.	Name of Contractor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A.	 Recording: Maintain one copy of Record Drawings during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes.	Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B.	 Maintenance of Record Drawings: Store Record Drawings in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Drawings for construction purposes. Maintain Record Drawings in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Drawings for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS	017839 – 3 of 3

SECTION 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	 Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel in demonstration and training of operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

B.	Related Sections:

1.	 Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data” for operation and maintenance manuals and data.
2.	 Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections.

1.3	SUBMITTALS

A.	 Training materials in addition to Operation and Maintenance manuals required in Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data.”

B.	 Instruction Program Schedule: Submit outline schedule of instructional program that includes and coordinates programs for all products, equipment, and systems requiring demonstration and training. Schedule shall include a list of training sessions, proposed dates, times, length of instruction time.

1.	Schedule shall be coordinated and finalized with the Owner.

1.4	QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.	 Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training of Owner’s personnel.

1.5	COORDINATION

A.	 Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner, adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations.

2023-06	DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING	017900 – 1 of 4

B.	 Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C.	 Coordinate content of training sessions with content of approved operation and maintenance manuals.	Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1	INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A.	 Provide instruction programs that include training sessions for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. Include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:

1.	 Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a.	System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b.	Operating standards.
c.	Regulatory requirements. d.	Equipment function.
e.	Operating characteristics. f.	Limiting conditions.
g.	Performance curves.

2.	Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a.	Emergency manuals. b.	Operations manuals. c.	Maintenance manuals.
d.	Project record documents. e.	Identification systems.
f.	Warranties and bonds.
g.	Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3.	Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a.	 Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.
b.	Instructions on stopping.
c.	Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
d.	Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e.	Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
f.	Special operating instructions and procedures.

2023-06	DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING	017900 – 2 of 4

4.	Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a.	Startup procedures.
b.	Equipment or system break-in procedures. c.	Routine and normal operating instructions. d.	Regulation and control procedures.
e.       Control sequences. f.        Safety procedures.
g.	Instructions on stopping.
h.	Normal shutdown instructions.
i.	Operating procedures for emergencies.
j.	Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k.	Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
l.	Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m.	Special operating instructions and procedures.

5.	Adjustments: Include the following:

a.	Alignments.
b.	Checking adjustments.
c.	Noise and vibration adjustments.
d.	Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6.	Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a.	Diagnostic instructions.

b.	Test and inspection procedures.

7.	Maintenance: Include the following:

a.	Inspection procedures.
b.	Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
c.	List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d.	Procedures for routine cleaning
e.	Procedures for preventive maintenance. f.	Procedures for routine maintenance.
g.	Instruction on use of special tools.

8.	Repairs: Include the following:

a.	Diagnosis instructions. b.	Repair instructions.
c.	 Disassembly;	component	removal,	repair,	and	replacement; and reassembly instructions.
d.	Instructions for identifying parts and components.
e.	Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

2023-06	DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING	017900 – 3 of 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	PREPARATION

A.	Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction and training.	Assemble training manuals organized in coordination with requirements in Division 01 Section "Operations and Maintenance Data."

B.	 Coordinate with Owner for number of instruction times, location, and number of participants.

C.	Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2	INSTRUCTION

A.	 Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1.	Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

B.	 Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1.	 Schedule initial training with Owner, through Architect with at least 7 days' advance notice.

C.	 Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING	017900 – 4 of 4

SECTION 02 41 09 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	This Section includes the following:

1.	Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2.	Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
3.	Salvage of existing items to be reused or returned to Owner.

B.	Related Sections include the following:

1.	 Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations.
2.	Division 01 Section "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.
3.	 Division 01 Section “Construction Waste Management and Disposal” for salvaging, recycling, and disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
4.	Division 09 Sections as applicable to adhered floor systems.

1.3	DEFINITIONS

A.	 Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and salvaged for reinstallation.

B.	 Remove and Salvage: Detach item from existing construction, and deliver them to Owner. Items to be salvaged shall be removed without damage to the item.

C.	 Remove and Salvage for Reinstallation:	Detach item from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and securely store item until it is to be reinstalled at locations indicated. Items to be salvaged shall be removed without damage to the item.

D.	Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed.

2023-06	SELECTIVE DEMOLITION	02 41 09 - 1 of 6

1.4	SUBMITTALS

A.	 Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property for dust control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

B.	Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1.	 Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity.	Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.
2.	 Interruption of utility services.	Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
3.	Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

C.	 Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition.

D.	Predemolition Photographs: Submit before Work begins.

E.	 Statement of Refrigerant Recovery:	Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.

F.	 Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition.

G.	Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

1.5	QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.	 Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.

B.	 Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition.	Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

C.	Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.

D.	 Predemolition Conference:	Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition.

1.6	PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.	 Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

2023-06	SELECTIVE DEMOLITION	02 41 09 - 2 of 6

B.	 Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

C.	 Hazardous Materials: Asbestos has been identified. See attached asbestos abatement specifications and sample report.

D.	Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS	(Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	EXAMINATION

A.	Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.

B.	 Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

C.	 Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged.

D.	 When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate, and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

3.2	UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A.	 Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

B.	 Service/System Requirements:	Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1.	 Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

a.	 Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed with removal of the wall.

3.3	PREPARATION

A.	 Site Access and Temporary Controls:	Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

2023-06	SELECTIVE DEMOLITION	02 41 09 - 3 of 6

1.	 Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls."

B.       Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1.	 Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.
2.	 Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

C.	 Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1.	 Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

3.4	SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A.	 General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1.	 Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.	Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
2.	 Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.
3.	 Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site.
4.	 Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
5.	Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B.	Removed and Salvaged Items:

1.	Clean salvaged items.

a.	 Items to be removed and salvaged for reinstallation shall be cleaned and repaired to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.	Paint equipment to match new equipment.

2.	Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3.	Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner or reinstallation. 4.	Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

2023-06	SELECTIVE DEMOLITION	02 41 09 - 4 of 6

5.	Items salvaged to Owner shall be held at the Project site for Owner’s pick-up.
6.	 Items to be reinstalled shall be installed in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

C.	Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1.	Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
2.	Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3.	Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4.	 Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated

D.	 Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

1.	 Items removed, salvaged, and reinstalled for the Contractor’s convenience shall be considered the same as items to be removed and salvaged for reinstallation.

3.5	SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A.	 Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:	Using power-driven saw, cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.

1.	Where possible or feasible, cut concrete at existing joints.

B.	 Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts.

C.	 Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. See Section 07 “Roofing” for new roofing requirements.

1.	Remove existing roofing system down to substrate.

D.	 Resilient Floor Coverings:	Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum.

1.	 Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate in accordance with flooring manufacturer’s written recommendations.

E.	Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants.

2023-06	SELECTIVE DEMOLITION	02 41 09 - 5 of 6

3.6	DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A.	 General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1.	Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2.	 Remove and transport debris in accordance with local regulations and in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B.	Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C.	 Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.7	CLEANING

A.	 Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	SELECTIVE DEMOLITION	02 41 09 - 6 of 6

SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01	SECTION INCLUDES

A.	Formwork for cast-in-place concrete with shoring, bracing and anchorage.

B.	Openings for other work.

C.	Form accessories.

D.	Form stripping.

E.	Related Sections
1.	Section 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement. 2.	Section 03 30 00 Cast-In Place Concrete. 3.	Section 03 39 00, Concrete Curing.

1.02	REFERENCES

A.	ACI 117 - Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.

B.	ACI 318-14 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.

C.	PS-1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.

D.	 California Code of Regulations, Title 8 Subchapter 4. Construction Safety Orders, Article 29, Erection and Construction, Section 1717.

E.	Chapter 19, 2022 California Building Code.

F.	APA - American Plywood Association Design and Construction Guide.

G.	Local AQMD - Air Quality Management District.

1.03	DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A.	 Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to ACI 318 Section 26.11. Resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension. Design of formwork is Contractor’s responsibility.

B.	 The formwork shall be designed for the loads and lateral pressures outlined in Chapter 2 of ACI 347R, and lateral forces as specified by the CBC.

C.	Above grade forms for elevated slabs and for walls exceeding 4 ft. in height shall be designed by a professional Civil or Structural engineer registered in the State of California.

2023-44	CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT	031000 - 1

D.	 Foundation concrete may be placed directly into neat excavations, provided foundation trench walls are sufficiently stable subject to approval of DSA. Otherwise, minimum formwork is mandatory to insure clean excavations and properly formed surfaces immediately prior to and during placing of concrete.

1.04	COORDINATION

A.	 Coordinate this Section with other Sections of work that require attachment of components to formwork.

B.	 If formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, Contractor shall adjust reinforcement positioning to accomplish required cover or otherwise request instructions from Architect before proceeding.

1.05	SUBMITTALS

A.	 Submit specification for type of form material to use for each exposed surface to be formed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01	FORM MATERIALS

A.	 Plywood: APA - MDO (Medium Density Overlay) Plyform, Group 1, Exterior, PS-1, for exposed surfaces.	APA - BB (No-overlay) Plyform, Class 1, Exterior, PS-1 for unexposed surfaces.

B.	Lumber: Douglas Fir species; construction grade with grade stamp clearly visible.

2.02	FORMWORK ACCESSORIES

A.	 Form Release Agent: Colorless non-staining liquid chemical agent, free of wax or oils which will not absorb water. Material shall comply with AQMD, Local Regulations.

B.	Corners: Chamfered type; maximum possible lengths.

C.	 Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01	EXAMINATION

A.	 Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork.	Ensure that dimensions agree with Drawings.

2023-44	CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT	031000 - 2

3.02	ERECTION - FORMWORK

A.	 Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements in accordance with requirements of ACI 318 Section 26.11.
1.	 Where public areas such as sidewalks and streets are to be shored, drawings and calculations are to be submitted by Contractor to the city or governing agency for approval prior to beginning of any work.
2.	 Contractor and/or his engineer assume and accept all responsibility for construction and safety of formwork and shoring.
3.	 Upon completion of Work, formwork and shoring materials are to be removed from site at expense of Contractor. Certain steel and/or concrete materials may be left in place with written approval of Architect.

B.	 Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads.

C.	Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shoring. Conform to Title 8, Subchapter 4, Construction Safety Orders, CCR.

D.	Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.

E.	 Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on Drawings.

F.	Provide chamfer strips on external corners.

G.	 Surface irregularities, ACI 347R Class A, gradual or abrupt irregularities of 1/8 inch for exposed to view concrete. Class B, 1/4 inch for plaster cement finish.

3.03	APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT

A.	Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B.	Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices and embedded items.

C.	 Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.

3.04	INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS AND OPENINGS

A.	 Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work. No openings or embedded items permitted in structural slabs within 18 inches of columns. Conform to ACI 318 Section 26.11.

B.	Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.

2023-44	CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT	031000 - 3

C.	 Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors and other inserts, whether indicated on the structural drawings or not.

D.	 Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, straight, level and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.

E.	 Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain.

F.	 Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.

3.05	FORM CLEANING

A.	Clean and remove foreign matter within forms as erection proceeds.

B.	Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.

C.	 Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.

3.06	FORMWORK TOLERANCES

A.	Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117.

3.07	FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.	 Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties and items are secure.

3.08	FORM REMOVAL

A.	 Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. Conform to ACI 318 Section 26.11.2.

1. Minimum stripping time for edges of slabs and footings: 3 days.

B.	 Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. Do not break-off corners.

C.	 Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged. Discard damaged forms. Re-shoring permitted only after 10 days from stripping.

END OF SECTION

2023-44	CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT	031000 - 4

SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01	SECTION INCLUDES

A.	Fabricating and setting reinforcing steel and accessories for cast-in-place concrete.

B.	Related Sections:
1.	Section 03 10 00, Concrete Formwork 2.	Section 03 30 00, Concrete

1.02	REFERENCES

A.	ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcing.

B.	ACI 318-14 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary.

C.	ASTM A1064 – Standard Specification for Carbon-steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for concrete.

D.	ASTM A615 - Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

E.	ASTM A706 - Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

F.	CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Manual of Practice.

G.	Chapter 19, 2022 California Building Code.

1.03	SUBMITTALS

A.	 Shop Drawings, indicating bar sizes, spacings, locations and quantities of reinforcing steel bending and cutting schedules and supporting and spacing devices.

1.04	QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.	 Provide Testing Laboratory with access to fabrication plant to facilitate inspection of reinforcement. Provide notification of commencement and duration of shop fabrication in sufficient time to allow inspection.

B.	Comply with the requirements of Division 01 General Requirements.

1.05	COORDINATION

A.	Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work.

2023-06	CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT	032000 -

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01	REINFORCEMENT

A.	 Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, deformed billet steel bars, in grades as follows, and conforming to ACI 318 Chapter 20 and Section 26.6.
1.	For No.4 and larger bars, use 60 ksi yield grade.
2.	For ties and stirrups, and No. 3 and smaller bars, use 40 or 60 ksi yield grade.

B.	 Welded Wire Reinforcement: Plain type, ASTM A1064; in flat sheets; uncoated finish, 6 x 6 - W4.0 x W4.0 unless otherwise noted on drawings.

2.02	ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A.	Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gauge black annealed type.

B.	 Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement conditions.

C.	 Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers Adjacent to Weather Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Plastic coated steel type; size and shape as required.

D.	Concrete Blocks: Approximately 3 inches dimension each side.

2.03	FABRICATION

A.       Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI Manual of Practice and ACI 315 and ACI 318. Wherever possible, make bends to shape in fabricator's shop.
1.	Bars reduced in section will not be accepted. 2.	Bars with kinks are unacceptable.
3.	Bars shall not be heated to facilitate bending or for any other purpose.
4.	 Bars with bends not indicated on drawings will not be accepted. Perform no forming in a manner which will damage bars.
5.	Re-bending of bars prohibited.

B.	Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on Drawings at point of minimum stress.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01	PLACEMENT

A.	 General: Comply with CBC and CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

B.	 Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position. Install concrete blocks to support reinforcement over grade. Rocks not permitted.

2023-06	CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT	032000 -

C.	 Do not displace or damage vapor barrier where vapor barrier is specified or indicated on drawings. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

D.	Accommodate placement of formed openings.

E.	 Prior to placing, thoroughly clean reinforcement of all rust, dirt, dust, oil or any other material deleterious to bonding of concrete.

F.	Accurately place and securely tie reinforcement with black annealed wire and securely hold in position during placing of concrete by means of precast concrete block supports. Point wire tie ends away from the form. Unless otherwise indicated, the number, type, and spacing of supports shall conform to the ACI 315.
1.	 Tie reinforcement splices and intersections per CBC and CRSI, Chapter 10-General Principles for Placing, Splicing and Tying Reinforcing Bars.

G.	 During placing of structural concrete slabs, provide a full-time reinforcing steel placer to repair and replace reinforcing to its proper location. Provide additional chairs of the proper size available to place under bars displaced during the concrete pouring operation.

H.	 Dowels for Walls: Securely tie in place prior to placing of concrete. Do not place dowels in concrete after pour.

I.	 Conform to ACI 318-14 Section 20.6.1.3.1, and Structural Drawings for concrete cover over reinforcement. Where conflicts occur between the referenced documents, the more stringent shall apply.

1. Where fire protective cover is specified exceeding the ACI and structural drawing specification, the fire protective cover shall apply.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT	032000 -

SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01	SECTION INCLUDES

A.	Cast-in-place concrete.

B.	Concrete slabs on grade, footings and curbs for walls.

C.	Concrete over structural metal composite floor deck.

D.	 Control, expansion and contraction joint devices associated with concrete work including joint sealants.

E.	Related Sections
1.	Section 03 10 00, Concrete Formwork
2.	Section 03 20 00, Concrete Reinforcement 3.	Section 03 39 00, Concrete Curing
4.	Section 32 13 13, Sitework Concrete

1.02	REFERENCES

A.	CBC - 2019 California Building Code 1.                     CBC Chapter 19, Concrete

B.	ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990

C.	ADA/Standards - ADA Title II Regulations and the DOJ/Standards for Accessible Design

D.	ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings.

E.	ACI 318-2014 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. 1.	ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregate.
2.	ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.

F.	ASTM C171 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.

G.	ASTM C1107 - Packaged Dry, Hydraulic - Cement Grout (Nonshrink).

H.	ASTM C1116 - Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete.

I.	ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Bituminous Type).

J.	ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

2023-06	CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE	033000 - 1

K.	CSS - Caltrans Standard Specifications, Latest Edition.

1.03	SUBMITTALS

A.	 Placement Schedule: Submit for approval details and/or sketches showing location of each proposed construction joint.	Do not deviate from locations of horizontal joints indicated on drawings.

B.	 Product data for each type of manufactured material and product included. Design mix for each concrete mix.

C.	 Steel reinforcement shop drawings, including material, grade bar schedules, spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement and supports.

D.	 Submit contraction (crack control) joint, expansion, isolation and construction joint layout to Architect for approval.

1.04	PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A.	Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that are concealed from view.

B.	 Maintain an accurate record showing date and time of concrete placement in each portion of structure.	Correlate placing record for test cylinders made by testing laboratory. Maintain a separate record giving date of removal of forms, shoring, including first and second halves and reshoring, if used. Keep records available for inspection at site.       Upon completion, deliver two copies of each to Architect in approved form.

1.05	QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.	 Perform Work in accordance with Section 1905, California Building Code, and ACI 318.1 and 318.3.

B.	Maintain one copy of all records.

C.	Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work.

D.	 Conform to ACI Chapter 26.5.5 and ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. No concrete placement permitted above 90 degrees Fahrenheit. Limit concrete temperature to 95 degrees Fahrenheit.

E.	 Conform to ACI Chapter 26.5.4 and ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. No concrete placement permitted below 50 degrees Fahrenheit.

1.06	COORDINATION

A.	 Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories.

2023-06	CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE	033000 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01	CONCRETE MATERIALS

A.	Cement: ASTM C150, Type II. Portland Cement Type, conforming to Section 1903A, California Building Code.

B.	Aggregates:
1.	Aggregate for Stone Concrete: ASTM C33.
2.	Aggregate for Lightweight Concrete: ASTM C330.

C.	 Conform to requirements on structural drawings for maximum size of aggregate permitted in individual applications.

D.	Water: Clear, from potable source, and not detrimental to concrete.

2.02	ACCESSORIES

A.	 Non-Shrink Grout:	ASTM C1107, Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 5,000 psi in 24 hours and 8,000 psi in 7 days; of consistency suitable for application and a 30 minute working time.

B.	Vapor Barrier at interior slabs: In accordance with Section 07 26 16.

C.	Reinforcement: In accordance with Section 03 20 00.

D.	Concrete Formwork: In accordance with Section 03 10 00.

2.03	JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS

A.	 Expansion Joint Filler - ASTM D1751: Close cell bituminous saturated fiberboard, 1/2 inch thick; Fiber Expansion Joint manufactured by American Highway Technology, Kankakee, IL, W. R. Meadows, or approved equal.

B.	 Expansion Joint Top:	Integral extruded polystyrene plastic; 1/2 inch thick, with removable top strip exposing sealant trough, JOINT CAPS manufactured by The Burke Company, or equal as approved in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements for substitutions.

C.	 Joint Backing: ASTM C1330, Cylindrical, Type C, closed cell, polyethylene backer rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.	Green Rod by Nomaco Inc. or equal.

D.	 Sealant: Polyurethane multi-component type, non-sagging or self leveling at flatwork, as specified in Section 07 92 00.

E.	 Saw-Cut Joint Filler:	Two-component epoxy resin, gray color, non-hardening, self-leveling, SIKADUR 51 (SL), by Sikacorp., Lyndhurst, NJ, or equal as approved in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements for Substitutions.

2023-06	CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE	033000 - 3

2.04	CONCRETE MIX

A.	Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with Section 1905, California Building Code.

B.	 Deliver concrete in transit mixers only. Discharge loads in less than 1-1/2 hours after water is first added.

1.	 Design Mix: ACI 318 Chapter 26. Ingredients and proportions for design mix shall be selected by a DSA-approved Testing Laboratory certified by a registered civil engineer licensed in California in conformance with the limitations specified on the structural drawings, unless otherwise approved under the Substitution Request submittal procedures of this Specification.
2.	Required Strength: As noted on the structural drawings.
3.	 Select proportions by volume for concrete in accordance with the approved design mix.
4.	All mix designs for this project to be installed in areas to receive moisture sensitive flooring, as specified in the Architect’s documents, shall include a 15% flyash substitute for cement by volume. Class "C" flyash is not permitted.
5.	 Do not exceed water-cement ratios by weight for concrete items as specified on the structural drawings.
6.      Comply with structural drawings for other limitations to each mix design specified. 7.      Miscellaneous Sitework Concrete:     Specified in Section 32 13 13, Sitework
Concrete.

2.05	GROUT MIX

A.	1:3:2 parts Portland Cement, to sand, to pea gravel, at minimum 2000 psi at 28 days.

2.06	DRYPACK

A.	 Cement/sand mix of consistency to pack dry below base plates and other components as specified. Minimum 5,000 psi.

B.	Alternate flowable cementitious fill material may be used if properly dammed and consolidated below components. Minimum 5,000 psi.

2.07	GRANULAR FILL

A.	 Crushed Aggregate Base (capillary break): 3/4 inch maximum grading, crushed rock and rock dust conforming to requirements of Section 200-2.2, SSPWC, with 3/8 inch sieve requirement waived, or Class 2 Aggregate Base as defined in Section 26, CSS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01	EXAMINATION

A.	Verify site conditions.

B.	Verify compaction has been completed per specifications.

C.	Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.

2023-06	CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE	033000 - 4

D.	 Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.

3.02	PREPARATION

A.	 Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with sandblasting to remove laitance and expose clean aggregate.

B.	 In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill and clean holes in existing concrete in accordance with the ICC ESR report specified on the structural drawings for the type of epoxy indicated. All non-structural epoxy dowel applications require IOR inspection during installation. All structural epoxy dowel applications will be subject to “special inspection and testing” at Structural Engineer's direction.

C.	 When approved by the Architect, clean previously placed concrete with steel brush and apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D.	Under Interior Slabs on Grade: Refer to Geotechnical Report.

E.	Install steel reinforcing per Section 03 20 00.

3.03	PLACING CONCRETE

A.	 Place concrete in accordance with ACI 318 Section 26.5.2. Remove loose dirt from excavations.

B.	 Notify Architect minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of operations.	All excavations, forms and reinforcing shall be inspected and approved by the “special inspector” and Architect prior to placement.

C.	 Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joint fillers, joint devices and accessories are not disturbed during concrete placement.

D.	Install joint fillers, primer and sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E.	 When detailed on the drawings, separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with 1/2 inch thick joint filler.

F.	 Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch of finished slab surface using two-component polyurethane sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00.

G.	Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as detailed.

H.	 Install construction joint device in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

I.	 Maintain joint device in correct position to allow joint cover flush with finish. J. Install joint covers in longest practical length.

2023-06	CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE	033000 - 5

J.	 Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control and construction joints.
1.	 Install expansion joints at vertical concrete walls at 24 feet on center unless noted otherwise on drawings.
2.	 Retaining Walls at Buildings: install waterstops in expansion joints to form a continuous waterproofed wall surface condition.	Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work.

K.	Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur.

L.	Avoid segregation of materials. Perform vibrating so as to produce a dense, smooth application free of rock pockets and voids.	Do not use vibrators to move concrete horizontally.

M.	 Provide special mix prepared by the Testing Laboratory and approved by the Architect utilizing smaller aggregates in areas of reinforcing congestion to prevent the formation of rock pockets.

N.	 The unconfined vertical drop of concrete shall not be greater than 5 feet. Do not allow concrete to fall free from any height that will cause materials to segregate. Maximum height of free fall permitted in any case: 5 feet. Utilize trunks or additional chutes where doubt occurs. Conform to requirements of ACI 318 Section 5.10.

O.	 Horizontal Construction Joints:	Wash surface of each joint shortly after pouring to expose clean, sound aggregate. Sandblast surface to remove laitance remaining or loose aggregate as approved by the Architect. Conform to ACI 318 Section 5.7.

P.	 Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/8 inch in 10 ft. Slope floors for drains.

Q.	 Exterior Slab Contraction Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch, place joints at column lines and at 12 ft. o.c. each way, maximum. Remove groover tool marks on exposed concrete surfaces. Contractor's option: Saw cut joints, early-entry dry-cut, per ACI 302.1R.

R.	 Isolation Joints: preformed joint filler depth of slab, fill top 1/2 inch with elastomeric sealant per Section 07 92 00.	Locations: at columns, footings, and as noted on drawings.

S.	 Surface irregularities, ACI 347R Class A, gradual or abrupt irregularities of 1/8 inch for exposed to view concrete. Class B, 1/4 inch for plaster cement finish.

3.04	CURING AND PROTECTION

A.	In accordance with Section 03 39 00 Concrete Curing.

2023-06	CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE	033000 - 6

3.05	FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.	 Provide free access to Work and cooperate with Architect and Testing Laboratory.

1.	Proposed mix design of each class of concrete shall conform to Section 1905A, California Building Code and shall be approved by the Architect prior to commencement of work.

B.	 Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E1155 (ASTM E 1155M) within 72 hours of finishing.

1.	Slabs on Ground:

a.	 Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10 foot long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch.
b.	Area for installation of sealed concrete: Specified overall values of flatness, FF 45; and of levelness, FL 35; with minimum local values of flatness, FF 30; and of levelness, FL 24.

3.06	PATCHING

A.	Architect will inspect concrete surfaces and determine imperfections, if any.

B.	Patch imperfections as approved and in accordance with ACI 301.
1.	 Clean all exposed concrete surfaces and all adjoining work stained by leakage of concrete. Remove all fins, butts and projections by grinding. Patch voids, rock pockets, holes, cracks and similar imperfections by chipping loose concrete and exposing clean, sound aggregate.
2.	Fill cone form tie recesses with Portland cement mortar flush to finish surface.

3.07	DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

A.	 Defective Concrete: Remove concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements.

B.	Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect.

C.	 Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair or replace exposed concrete except upon express approval of Architect for each individual area.

D.	Repairs of Concrete shall comply with the ACI and written directive from the Architect.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE	033000 - 7

SECTION 033518 CONCRETE SEALER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	Section Includes:

1.	Single application cure-sealer-hardener for new concrete floors. 2.	Single application sealer-hardener for cured concrete floors.
3.	Precautions for avoiding staining concrete before and after application.

B.	Related Sections:

1.	Division 03 Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete.”

1.3	REFERENCES

A.	ASTM International (ASTM):

1.	ASTM C39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
2.	ASTM C779 Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces.
3.	ASTM C805 Standard Test Method for Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete. 4.	ASTM C1028 Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of
Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.
5.	ASTM D3359 Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.
6.	ASTM G23 Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type) With and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials (Withdrawn 2000).

1.4	SUBMITTALS

A.	See Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” for overall submittal procedures.

B.	Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C.	Qualification Data: For qualified installer.

2023-06	CONCRETE SEALER	033518 - 1 of 4

D.	 Maintenance Data: Maintenance instructions, including precautions for avoiding staining after application.

1.5	QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.	 Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is certified in writing by manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's products.

B.	 VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6	DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A.	 Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

B.	 Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

C.	Handling: Protect materials from dirt, corrosion, oil, grease and other contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1	CONCRETE SEALER

A.	Basis of Design: Drawings and Specifications are based on the following:

1.	Curecrete Distribution, Inc.; Ashford Formula.

a.	 Subject to compliance with requirements, submit specified product or a comparable product subject to request for substitution.

B.	 Cure-Seal-Hardener: Water-based chemically reactive penetrating sealer and hardener that seals by densifying concrete so that water molecules cannot pass through but air and water vapor can, and allows concrete to achieve full compressive strength, minimizing surface crazing and eliminating dusting.

1.	Abrasion Resistance to Revolving Disks: At least a 32.5% improvement over untreated samples when tested in accordance with ASTM C779.
2.	 Surface Adhesion: At least a 22% increase in adhesion for epoxy when tested in accordance with ASTM D3359.
3.	Hardening: As follows when tested in accordance with ASTM C39:

a.	After 7 Days: An increase of at least 40% over untreated samples. b.	After 28 Days: An increase of at least 38% over untreated samples.

4.	Coefficient of Friction: 0.86 dry, 0.69 wet when tested in accordance with ASTM

2023-06	CONCRETE SEALER	033518 - 2 of 4

C1028.
5.	 Rebound Number: An increase of at least 13.3% over untreated samples when tested in accordance with ASTM C805.
6.	 Light Exposure Degradation: No evidence of adverse effects on treated samples when tested in accordance with ASTM G23.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	EXAMINATION

A.	 Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of the Work of this Section.

B.	Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2	PREPARATION

A.	Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B.	 Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

C.	Do not use frozen material. Thaw and agitate prior to use.

D.	 If construction equipment must be used for application, diaper all components that might drip oil, hydraulic fluid or other liquids.

3.3	INSTALLATION

A.	 General: Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions and product carton instructions for installation.

1.	Apply cure-seal-hardener to exposed interior concrete floor slabs indicated to have a sealed concrete finish.

B.	 New Concrete: Apply cure-seal-hardener to new concrete as soon as the concrete is firm enough to work on after troweling.

1.	Spray on at rate of 200 ft2/gal (5 m2/L).
2.	 Keep surface wet with cure-seal-hardener for a minimum soak-in period of 30 minutes without allowing it to dry out or become slippery. In hot weather, slipperiness may appear before the 30 minute time period has elapsed, if slipperiness occurs, apply additional cure-seal-hardener as needed to keep the entire surface in a non-slippery state for the first 15 minutes. For the remaining 15 minutes, mist the surface as needed with water to keep the material in a non-slippery state. In hot weather conditions, follow manufacturer’s special application procedures.

2023-06	CONCRETE SEALER	033518 - 3 of 4

3.	 When the treated surface becomes slippery after this period, lightly mist with water until slipperiness disappears.
4.	 Wait for surface to become slippery again, and then flush entire surface with water to remove all cure-seal-hardener residue.
5.	 Squeegee surface completely dry, flushing any remaining slippery areas until no residue remains.
6.	 Wet vacuum or scrubbing machines may be used in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to remove residue.

C.	Existing or Cured Concrete: Apply cure-seal-hardener only to clean bare concrete.

1.	Thoroughly remove previous treatments, laitance, oil and other contaminants. 2.	Saturate surface with cure-seal-hardener; re-spray or broom excess onto dry
spots.
3.	 Keep surface wet with cure-seal-hardener for a minimum soak-in period of 30 to 40 minutes.
4.	 If most of the material has been absorbed after the 30 minute soak-in period, remove all excess material, especially from low spots, using broom or squeegee.
5.	 If most of the material remains on the surface after the 30 minute soak-in period, wait until the surface becomes slippery and then flush with water, removing all cure-seal-hardener residue. Squeegee completely dry, flushing any remaining slippery areas until no residue remains.
6.	If water is not available, remove residue using squeegee.

3.4	PROTECTION

A.	 Protect installed floors for at least 3 months until chemical reaction process is complete.

1.	Do not allow traffic on floors for 3 hours after application. 2.	Do not allow parking of vehicles on concrete slab.
3.	 If vehicles must be temporarily parked on slab, place dropcloths under vehicles during entire time parked.
4.	Do not allow pipe cutting using pipe cutting machinery on concrete slab.
5.	 Do not allow temporary placement and storage of steel members on concrete slabs.
6.	Clean up spills immediately and spot-treat stains with degreaser or oil emulsifier. 7.	Clean floor regularly in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	CONCRETE SEALER	033518 - 4 of 4

SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01	SECTION INCLUDES

A.	Rough carpentry.

B.	Related Section:
1.	Section 01 35 43, Special Environment Requirements.

1.02	REFERENCES

A.	Chapters 7 and 23, 2022 CBC.

B.	ANSI/AWC HDS - 2012.

C.	 DOC PS 1 - Department of Commerce Product Standard, U. S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood.

D.	 DOC PS 20 - Department of Commerce Product Standard, American Softwood Lumber Standards.

E.	 DOC PS 2 - Department of Commerce Product Standard, U. S. Product Standard for Construction, Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels.

F.	ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard.

G.	 WWPA - Western Lumber Grading Rules 88, Latest Edition, by Western Wood Products Association.

H.	 APA - American Plywood Association Design/Construction Guide (Engineered Wood Association).

I.	AQMD - Local Air Quality Management District Regulations.

J.	AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood.

K.	WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau Standard Grading Rules No. 17.

L.	Title 8 - California Code of Regulations, Construction Safety Orders.

M.	ICC –ES – International Code Council Evaluation Service, Inc.

N.	 RIS – Redwood Inspection Service, Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber.

O.	FSC – Forest Stewardship Council Principles and Criteria.

2023-06	ROUGH CARPENTRY	061000 – 1 of 7

1.03	SUBMITTALS

A.	Product data and current ICC-ES Reports for framing anchors.

1.04	QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.	Rough Carpentry Lumber: Visible grade stamp on all products required.

B.       Grade Stamp: Association under whose rules it was graded, or official grade mark of other recognized grading agencies using grading rules, equivalent to WWPA or WCLIB.

C.	Association performing grading and grade marking of lumber shall be approved by Division of the State Architect (DSA).

D.	 Nailing guns and nail operators shall be approved in accordance with Title 8 Construction Safety Orders.

E.	All Plywood shall be free of urea-formaldehyde binders and adhesives.

1.05	DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.	 Do not deliver rough carpentry items until site conditions are adequate to receive the Work. Protect items from weather while in transit.

B.	 Store lumber and plywood at the site under cover or otherwise protected against exposure to weather, raise above ground and out of contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood and provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary covers. For pressure treated lumber and plywood, provide spacers between courses to permit air circulation.

C.	 Certified wood shall be kept separate from non-certified wood. Auditing process as mandated by certifiers shall be complied with.

1.06	PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.	 Cooperate with other trades in coordinating their Work with the Work of this Section. Provide wood grounds, blocking and nailer where indicated or as required for Work of other trades.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01	ROUGH CARPENTRY MATERIALS

A.	 Lumber: Graded in accordance with WWPA or WCLIB; maximum moisture content of 19 percent at time of loading. Provide Douglas Fir Larch for structural and framing lumber, surfaced four sides to standards of the grading association unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, use the following grades
1.	 Joists, rafters, beams, lintels, horizontal framing, posts, studs and vertical framing: Species and grades as indicated or noted on drawings.

2023-06	ROUGH CARPENTRY	061000 – 2 of 7

2.	 Non-bearing studs and plates, non-structural furring, concealed blocking, stripping and miscellaneous nailers and backing: No. 2 unless noted otherwise in the structural drawings.
3.	Structural Drawings take precedence for lumber grades.
4.	All lumber in contact with concrete shall be pressure treated.

B.	Shop Fabricated Structural Wood:
1.	 LSL: Where indicated, use Timberstrand material per ICC ESR-1387 – Fb = 2600 psi, Fv = 400 psi, E = 1.7x106, or approved equal. (Approved substitutes shall have ICC approval.)
2.	 PSL: Where indicated, use Parallam material per ICC ESR-1387 – Fb = 2700 psi, Fv = 260 psi, E = 1.9x106, or approved equal. (Approved substitutes shall have ICC approval.)
3.	 LVL: Where indicated, use Microllam material per ICC ESR-1387 – Fb = 2600 psi, Fv = 285 psi, E = 1.9x106, or approved equal. (Approved substitutes shall have ICC approval.)

C.	 Plywood (Wood Structural Panels):	Section 2303.1.5 CBC, Douglas Fir 1 Group Species, PS 1, APA Structural I Rated Sheathing. Bond Classification: Exterior. Thickness as indicated, span rating sized for spacing.
1.	For natural finished plywood: Panel Grade N veneer on face and B on back side. 2.	For painted finish: APA Sanded Plywood Panels, A-C Group 1, Exterior, sanded
face, touch sanded back side.
3.	 Thickness: Minimum 15/32 inch for walls and 19/32 inch for roof, or as indicated on Drawings.
4.	 Plywood shall be FSC certified; other sustainable forestry certifications will not be accepted.

D.	 Oriented Strand Board (OSB): PS 2, APA PRP-108, 15/32 inch through 3/4 inch APA Rated Sheathing and Structural 1 Rated Sheathing, Exposure 1, meeting NES “Oriented Strand Board Roof and Wall Sheathing, Combination Subfloor/Underlayment OSB Lap and Panel Siding (NER-124)”.

E.	 Preservative (Pressure) Treated Lumber: Section 2303.1.9 Conform to AWPA Manual of Recommended Practice, kiln dry after treatment. Use preservative complying with AWPA U1, latest edition. Products NOT containing arsenic or chromium. Conform to AQMD, Local Regulations.
1.	 Douglas Fir Larch, used as required by Section 2303, CBC, shall conform to the following
a.	Lumber shall be WWPA or WCLIB grade stamped.
b.	 Lumber shall be No. 1 grade or better unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

F.	Waterproof Membrane: ASTM D4601; Type II, asphalt saturated glass felt.

G.	Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Section 2303.2 CBC
1.	 Fire-Retardant Douglas Fir Lumber: Lumber shall be grade stamped by an approved agency at the factory, and shall bear identification indicating the fire performance rating thereof, Flame Spread Less than 25, ASTM E84. Lumber: AWPA C20.

2023-06	ROUGH CARPENTRY	061000 – 3 of 7

2.	 Fire-Retardant Treated Douglas Fir Plywood: AWPA Standard C-27, NFPA 703, ASTM D-5516, ASTM E-84, Section 2303.2, CBC, PS 1-09, APA structural rated sheathing, Exposure 1, 5/8 thick. Plywood shall comply with the following Maximum Flame Spread Classifications in the following locations

H.	Plywood Backing Panels
1.	 Telephone and Electrical Equipment, fixed equipment, cabinets, grab bars, door stops and plates: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, APA A-C, sanded, Veneer Grade, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1 inch nominal thickness. Installed “A” side out for paint finish.

I.	 Nails, Spikes and Staples: Section 2303.6 and 2304.10 CBC, Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated Galvanized for exterior exposed applications, high humidity locations and installation into treated wood and within 8" of soil or exterior slabs; plain finish for other interior locations; size and type to suit application. Comply with Table 2304.10.1.	Use common nails only.

J.	 Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Section 2304.10 CBC, sized to suit application, galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity locations and treated wood, plain finish for other interior locations.	Full diameter body bolts only per ASME B18.2.1(.2) or B18.2.6 for structural applications.

K.	 Fasteners: Expansion type or powder actuated type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete.	Refer to Division 01, General Requirements for acceptable types and required testing. Where installation and torque verification of wedge-type anchors is inspected by the IOR, testing of anchors will not be required unless directed by the SEOR for structural tension applications.

L.	 Stock Framing Connectors:	Section 2304.10 CBC types indicated on Drawings, galvanized, with nails fully driven in all holes in each face of connector. Conform to the following.
1.	 Manufacturers: Simpson Strong Tie Co., Inc., San Leandro, CA, United Steel Products, Montgomery, MN. or equal as approved in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements for Substitutions.
2.	ICC Listed.

M.	Non-Stock Framing Connectors: Conform to details. No substitutions allowed.

N.	 Nonshrink Grout:	ASTM C1107, premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 5,000 psi in 24 hours and 8,000 psi in 7 days; of consistency for application and a 30 minute working time. Acceptable Manufacturers: Dayton Superior, Miamisburg, OH; Sonneborn, Shakopee, MN; Novex Systems International, Clifton NJ, or equal.

O.	 Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

P.	Adhesives: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.

2023-06	ROUGH CARPENTRY	061000 – 4 of 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01	LAYOUT MARKINGS

A.	 Layout markings shall not be made with xylene-based inks, paint, or dyes, or with other solvent-based products that may bleed through finishes.

3.02	FRAMING, FURRING AND STRIPPING

A.	 Erect wood framing, furring, stripping and nailing members true to lines and levels. Do not deviate from true alignment more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, non-cumulative.

B.	Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths.

C.	Construct and erect required headers and lintels.

D.	 Use multiple wall framing members at openings as indicated on structural drawings. Space short members above and below openings in same manner as for walls.

E.	 Provide double joist headers at joist ends and around openings unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Bridge joists and rafters to conform Section 2304 CBC and as noted on plans. For pre-manufactured joists, provide bridging in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

F.	 Construct walls with studs of size spacing indicated, 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Install single sill member at bottom and double plate at top. Stagger upper and lower members of double plate with joints not less than 4 feet o.c. or as indicated on Drawings. Where sill or any wood member contacts concrete or masonry within 8" of soil or exterior slab or setting on interior slab, install preservative-treated lumber.

G.	 Provide one row of solid blocking not less than 2 inch nominal thickness and same width of stud at ceiling and floor lines and at spacing not to exceed 8 feet on center vertically. Fit snugly and attach with not less than two 10d nails.

H.	 Install 3 studs at corners unless otherwise indicated. Accommodate corner holdown attachments where they occur. Conform to structural drawing requirements for limits of cutting, notching and boring of sills, plates, studs, joists and beams.

I.	 Conform to Section 717, California Building Code for fire blocks and draft stops. Fire blocks and stops at 10-feet intervals and at ceiling level.

J.	 Fire-Retardant Wood: Ripping and milling are not permissible. Cross cutting to length, drilling holes, joining cuts and light sanding are permissible. It is not necessary to field treat cut ends to maintain flame spread rating. All cuts on plywood are considered end cuts and is permissible to be cut.

3.03	PLYWOOD SHEATHING

A.	Thickness as indicated on the Drawings, minimum thickness 15/32 inch.

2023-06	ROUGH CARPENTRY	061000 – 5 of 7

B.       Nailing: of size and spacing indicated. Common wire only unless indicated use hot-dipped zinc coated galvanized in treated wood or wood within 8" or soil or exterior slabs.

C.	 Boundary Nailing: Not less than 3/8 inch from edge, spaced not more than 6 inches on center, unless noted otherwise on Drawings.

D.	Blocking: Panel edges shall bear on framing members or solid blocking.

E.	Minimum Size Vertical Panel: 16 inches wide.

F.	Minimum Size Horizontal Panel: 24 inches wide.

G.	 Oriented Strand Board not permitted for shear panels unless indicated on structural drawings.

3.04	FOUNDATION FRAMING, PLATES, SILLS AND SLEEPERS

A.	 Preservative treated wood required. Set wood sills on a bead of continuous butyl sealant on both edges of sill.

B.	 Use hot-dipped zinc coated galvanized nails in treated wood and wood within 8" of soil or exterior slabs.

3.05	HORIZONTAL FRAMING

A.	 Bearing: 1-1/2 inch minimum on wood or metal, 3 inches on masonry unless otherwise detailed on drawings. Lay framing members with crown up. Members with knots at bottom not permitted.

B.	Lateral Support: Use solid blocking, cross bridging or other approved means.

C.	Do not run joists continuous beyond one span unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

D.	Openings: Frame openings in walls as specified on the structural drawings.

E.	 Treat ends of timber beams and posts exposed to weather by dipping in water-repellent preservative for 15 minutes.

3.06	INSTALLATION OF BACKBOARDS

A.	 Provide backing panels as indicated on Drawings to support telephone and electrical equipment, fixed equipment, cabinets, grab bars, door stops and plates.	Fasten securely to framing. Ensure that backing panels are installed with good side out (whose face side is free of blemishes) side by side, no mix of sides permitted.

B.	 Install to extent indicated on the drawings or as required for electrical or communication system installation.

C.	 Install with sheet metal screws, No.10 minimum, at 12 inches on center minimum. Drywall screws will not be permitted.

2023-06	ROUGH CARPENTRY	061000 – 6 of 7

D.	 Prime paint exposed faces. Do not cover manufacturer’s trade stamps indicating fire treatment.

E.	Final finish per Section 09 90 00, Painting.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	ROUGH CARPENTRY	061000 – 7 of 7

SECTION 066400
FIBERGLASS REINFORECED PLASTIC PANELING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Section.

including Sections,

General and apply to this

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	Section includes:

1.	Glass-fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) wall paneling and trim accessories.

B.	Related Sections:

1.	 Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board” for finish wall where installing plastic paneling.

1.3	SUBMITTALS

A.	See Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures” for overall submittal procedures.

B.	Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C.	Samples for Initial Selection: For plastic paneling and trim accessories.

D.	 Samples for Verification: For plastic paneling and trim accessories, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

1.	 For each type of product specified, 3.5 inch x 5 inch square sample of plastic paneling in specified texture and color.
a.	 Cut sample and seam together for representation of manufacturer’s seaming system.
b.	Approved samples may be retained by manufacturer as a standard of work.

E.	 Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans, details, attachment locations, notch and cutout locations, and any other components required prior to commencement of work.
1.	 Show locations and sizes of cutouts, electrical switch and outlet openings, holes and fixture information for wall panels.

2023-06	FIBERGLASS REINFORECED PLASTIC PANELING	066400 1 of 4

1.4	QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.	 Source Limitations:	Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer.

1.5	DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.	 Do not deliver components until painting and similar finish operations that may damage the paneling have been completed in installation areas.

B.	 Store materials at the temperature and environmental conditions that the areas will be during use of a minimum 48 hours prior to installation.

C.	 Installer to handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces, and panel edges, and contamination of panel rear face.

1.6	PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.	 Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1	GENERAL

A.	 Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer.

2.2	FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC SHEET PANELING

A.	 General: Plastic panels complying with ASTM D 3841 comprised of thermosetting styrenated and acrylated polyester resins reinforced with glass fibers.

1.	 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a.	Kermlite Company, Inc. b.	Marlite, Inc.
c.	Nudo Products, Inc.

2.	Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch. 3.	Surface Finish: Pebble Texture.
4.	 Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of not less than six colors.
5.	Size: 4 foot wide by 8 foot high in one panel with no horizontal joints.

2023-06	FIBERGLASS REINFORECED PLASTIC PANELING	066400 2 of 4

6.	 Surface-Burning Characteristics: Class A as determined according to ASTM E 84 by UL or another acceptable qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a.	Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

b.	Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

7.	Panels shall be USDA accepted for incidental food contact.

2.3	ACCESSORIES

A.	 Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels.	Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges.

1.	Color: Match panels.

B.	Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer.

C.	 Sealant:	Single-component,	mildew-resistant,	neutral-curing	silicone	sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

1.	Color: Match panels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	EXAMINATION

A.	 Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.	Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2	PREPARATION

A.	 Remove wall coverings, loose or soluble paint, and other materials that might interfere with adhesive bond.

B.	 Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even surface for panel installation.

C.	 Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust.

D.	 Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

2023-06	FIBERGLASS REINFORECED PLASTIC PANELING	066400 3 of 4

E.	 Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls not less than half the width of full panels.

1.	 Mark plumb lines on substrate at trim accessory or panel joint locations for accurate installation.
2.	 Locate trim accessories and panel joints to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3	INSTALLATION

A.	Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B.	 Install panels at locations indicated with vertical edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other panels, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations.

1.	 Install panels vertically without horizontal joints unless distance is greater than the maximum available panel length. Where horizontal joints cannot be avoided, provide H-shaped trim between panels.

C.	Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.

D.	Install trim accessories with adhesive.

E.	 Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant.

F.	Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.

G.	 Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.

3.4	CLEANING

A.	 Clean panel faces to remove soiling, stains, dust, and dirt using clean rags and cleaning agents as instructed by panel manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	FIBERGLASS REINFORECED PLASTIC PANELING	066400 4 of 4

SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	This Section includes the following:

1.	Extruded polystyrene foam plastic board insulation

2.	Glass fiber blanket insulation.

3.	Spray-applied cellulosic insulation.

B.	Related Sections include the following:

1.	Division 05 Section “Steel Deck” for floor deck framing.
2.	Division 07 Section “PVC Roofing” for insulation installed in PVC roofing system. 3.	Division 23 Sections as applicable to air distribution duct systems for insulation
for ducts.

1.3	SUBMITTALS

A.	See Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” for overall submittal procedures.

B.	Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.4	QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.	 Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer.

B.	 Surface-Burning Characteristics:	As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency.	Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

C.	For Spray-Applied Cellulosic Insulation:
1.	 Manufacturer must have a current Underwriter Laboratory (UL) Code Evaluation Report.
2.	Applicator: Must be licensed by manufacturer.

2023-06	THERMAL INSULATION	072100 - 1 of 5

1.5	DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.	 Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources.	Store inside and in a dry location.	Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1	EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A.	 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.	Owens Corning
2.	Dow Chemical Company 3.	DiversiFoam Products

B.	 Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation, Type IV: ASTM C578, Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa) minimum compressive strength; unfaced.

1.	One side to have grooved drainage channels.

2.	Compressive strength minimum of 25 psi.

3.	 Flame-Spread Index: Not more than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
4.	 Smoke-Developed Index: Not more than 450 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
5.	 Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly.
6.	 Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of insulation 12 inches (305 mm) and wider in width.

C.	Location: Insulation located at insulated slab under freezer.

2.2	GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A.	 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.	CertainTeed Corporation. 2.	Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 3.	Johns Manville.
4.	Knauf Fiber Glass. 5.	Owens-Corning.

B.       Unfaced Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation:      ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-

2023-06	THERMAL INSULATION	072100 - 2 of 5

developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics and tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

C.	 Faced Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II (non reflective faced) Class C (face surface not rated for flame propagation), Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier).

D.	 Reinforced-Foil-Faced Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face.

E.	 Thermal Resistance Values and Thicknesses:	Where Drawings indicate thermal resistance values, provide units of the following nominal equivalent thicknesses:

1.	R-13; 3-1/2 inch thickness. 2.	R-19; 6 inch thickness.
3.	R-21; 5-1/2 inch thickness. 4.	R-25; 8 inch thickness.
5.       R-30; 10 inch thickness. 6.       R-38; 12 inch thickness.

2.3	SPRAY-APPLIED CELLULOSIC INSULATION

A.	Basis of Design Products: Drawings and specifications are based on the following:

1.	International Cellulose Corporation, Product: K-13 and SonaSpray.

a.	 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or comparable product for review per Division 01 “Substitution Procedures” and approval by Architect.

B.	 Self-Supported, Spray-Applied Cellulosic Insulation: ASTM C1149, Type I (materials applied with liquid adhesive; suitable for either exposed or enclosed applications), chemically treated for flame-resistance, processing, and handling characteristics.

1.	Color: To be selected from Manufacturer’s standard color chart. 2.	Thickness: Per UL D925 table to achieve 1-hour fire rating.
3.	 Material to have been tested in accordance with ASTM E 1042.	Testing laboratory must be NVLAP accredited.

2.4	ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A.	Accessory materials shall be as recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer.

2023-06	THERMAL INSULATION	072100 - 3 of 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	EXAMINATION

A.	 Examine conditions, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.	 Verify surfaces to receive spray insulation to determine if priming/sealing is required to insure bonding and/or to prevent discoloration caused by migratory stains.

C.	Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2	PREPARATION

A.	 Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.

B.	 Prime surfaces to receive spray insulation as required by manufacturer’s instructions or as determined by examination.

3.3	INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A.	 Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B.	 Install insulation to provide a complete thermal envelope having thermal resistance values indicated on drawings.

C.	 Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

D.	 Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation.	Remove projections that interfere with placement.

E.	 Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

F.	 Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
1.       Build up the total required insulation thickness with 2 inch thick panel increments. 2.       If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches from exterior
walls.

2023-06	THERMAL INSULATION	072100 - 4 of 5

G.	 Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation:	Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1.	Install insulation of types indicated below

a.	Exterior Walls:
1)	Faced thermal insulation. 2)	R-13 for 4” furred walls. 3)	R-19 for 6” stud walls.

2.	 Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.
3.	 Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
4.	 Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.
5.	 Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves.
6.	 For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

H.	 Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1.	 Glass-Fiber Insulation: Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces of walls and around door and window frames. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.
2.	 Spray Polyurethane Insulation:	Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.

I.	 Water-Piping in Walls:	If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

3.4	PROTECTION

A.	 Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, moisture, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	THERMAL INSULATION	072100 - 5 of 5

SECTION 072616 UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Section.

including Sections,

General and apply to this

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	This Section includes the following:

1.	Under slab vapor barrier for concrete slabs on grade.

B.	Related Sections include but are not limited to the following:

1.	Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1.3	SUBMITTALS

A.	See Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” for overall submittal procedures.

B.	 Product Data:	For each type of product indicated, include manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions.

C.	Samples: For vapor barrier membrane.

D.	 Digital Photography: Digital photographs of completed installation including seam and penetration sealing, terminations at foundations, and repairs.

1.4	QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.	 Source Limitations: Obtain vapor barrier materials through one source from a single manufacturer.

B.	 Preinstallation Conference:	Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1.	 Review procedures for field quality control, vapor-barrier installation, steel reinforcement installation, repair procedures, and protection.

2023-06	UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER	072616 - 1 of 4

1.5	DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.	 Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened packaging, with labels identifying manufacturer and product.

B.	 Store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and to prevent damage.

C.	Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

1.6	PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.	Do not apply material during rain or during windy conditions.

B.	Do not apply on frozen ground.

1.7	COORDINATION

A.	 Coordinate installation of vapor barrier, reinforcing steel, and pouring of concrete slabs to minimize exposure of vapor barrier to sunlight.

B.	 Coordinate installation of vapor barrier with reinforcing steel to minimize tears and punctures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1	VAPOR BARRIERS

A.	 Plastic Vapor Barrier: Single ply membrane extruded from virgin grade high-impact polyolefin complying with ASTM E 1745, Class A.

1.	Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products:

a.	Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15. b.	Insulation Solutions Inc.; Viper II 15 mil. c.	W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Perminator 15.

2.	Thickness: 15 mils.
3.	Roll Width: 12 feet minimum.
4.	 Maximum Permeance: ASTM E96 new material 0.010 Perms; ASTM E154 Section 11 after weathering 0.010.
5.	Puncture Resistance: ASTM D1709, Method B, not less than 3,000 Grams.

2023-06	UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER	072616 - 2 of 4

2.2	AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A.	 General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by manufacturer for intended use and compatible with vapor barrier.

B.	 Seam Tape: High Density Polyethylene Tape with pressure sensitive adhesive as manufactured or recommended by vapor barrier manufacturer, minimum width 4 inches.

C.	 Pipe Boots: Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material and pressure sensitive tape per manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

D.	Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	EXAMINATION

A.	 Examine conditions with Installer present for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.	 Proceed with installation of vapor barrier only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2	PREPARATION

A.	Level and tamp or roll granular base as specified in Division 31 Section “Earthwork.”

B.	 Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders.

3.3	INSTALLATION OF VAPOR BARRIER

A.	 Vapor Barriers: Place, protect, and repair vapor barrier according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1.	Vapor barrier to be installed over prepared, finely graded subgrade.

B.	 Unroll vapor barrier and install with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the pour. Open all folds to the full width.

C.	Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

D.	 Seal holes, openings, and pipe and conduit penetrations in vapor barrier. Fabricate boots around pipes and conduits in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions and seal with tape.

2023-06	UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER	072616 - 3 of 4

E.	 Areas of adhesion for taped seams, penetrations, and repairs shall be free of dust, dirt, moisture, or other conditions affecting the performance of the tape seal.

F.	 Terminate vapor barrier at vertical foundation walls by turning up 4 inches against the wall and sealing with tape or fastening with concrete nails spaced 4 feet on center. Where vertical foundation walls do not occur, extend vapor barrier not less than 12 inches into footing trench prior to pouring footings.

G.	 Place 2 inches of dry sand over properly installed and inspected vapor barrier. Protect from rain and moisture; remove sand that is saturated or dampened prior to concrete placement.

H.	 Coordinate installation of vapor barrier with Work Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete.”

1.	Use only brick type reinforcing bar supports for reinforcing steel.
2.	Avoid driving stakes through vapor barrier membrane, repair all holes. 3.	Provide for protection of vapor barrier membrane in high traffic areas.

3.4	FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.	 Immediately after the installation of the vapor barrier, the Contractor, in the presence of the Owner’s Inspector or representative, shall review the completed installation and document the installation using digital photography. Documentation shall include the completed installation, seams, penetrations, terminations, and repairs.

B.	After installation of reinforcing steel and just prior to pouring of concrete, the Contractor, in the presence of the Owner’s Inspector or representative, shall review the installed vapor barrier for tears or damage.

C.	Inspection reports shall be submitted to the Architect and the Contractor.

3.5	REPAIRS

A.	 Repair tears and punctures with a vapor barrier patch that overlaps the damaged area by 6 inches in all directions, seal perimeter of the patch with tape.

3.6	PROTECTION

A.	 Protect installed vapor barriers from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes until concealed by permanent construction.

B.	Remove rain or water from barrier prior to concrete placement by air blowers.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER	072616 - 4 of 4

SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of Supplementary Conditions and Division Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	Section Includes:

the Contract, including General and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this

1.	Silicone joint sealants.
2.	Polyurethane joint sealants. 3.	Acrylic joint sealant.
4.	Butyl joint sealant. 5.	Epoxy joint sealant.
6.	Acoustical joint sealants. 7.	Joint sealant backings.

B.	Related Sections:

1.	 Division 07 Section "Joint Firestopping" for sealing joints in fire-resistance-rated construction.
2.	 Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for sealing penetrations in fire-resistance-rated construction.

1.3	PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A.	 Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing:	Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:

1.	 Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2.	 Conduct field tests for each application for each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated.
3.	 Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.
4.	Arrange for tests to take place with joint sealant manufacturer’s technical representative present.

a.	 Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

2023-06	JOINT SEALANTS	079200 1 of 12

1)	 For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

5.	 Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
6.	 Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results:	Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.

1.4	SUBMITTALS

A.	See Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” for overall submittal procedures.

B.	Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

C.	 Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

D.	 Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch wide joints formed between two 6-inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

E.	Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1.	Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2.	Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3.	Joint-sealant formulation. 4.	Joint-sealant color.

F.	Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

G.	Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.

H.	 Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

I.	 Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports:	Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.

J.	Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.

K.	Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

2023-06	JOINT SEALANTS	079200 2 of 12

1.5	QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.	 Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B.	 Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.

C.	Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.

1.	 Testing Agency Qualifications:	An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

D.	 Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section.	Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.

E.	Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.6	PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.	Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1.	 When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
2.	When joint substrates are wet.
3.	 Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
4.	 Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.

1.7	WARRANTY

A.	 Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Contractor and Installer agree to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1.	Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B.	 Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1.	Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C.	 Special warranties specified in this article shall warrant that all exposed sealants will be guaranteed against any crazing developing on the surfaces of the material, any staining of adjacent surfaces by sealant or by primer (yellowing, etc.), chalking, or color changes on surface of cured sealant.

2023-06	JOINT SEALANTS	079200 3 of 12

D.	 Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

E.	 Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1.	 Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
2.	 Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3.	Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4.	 Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1	MATERIALS, GENERAL

A.	 Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B.	 VOC Content of Sealants: VOC content of sealants shall comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.	Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1.	Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
2.	Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3.	Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

C.	Silicone Joint Sealant:
1.	 Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant:	ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT.
2.	 Single-Component, Nonsag, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
3.	 Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.

D.	Urethane Joint Sealant:
1.	 Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for USE NT.
2.	 Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.

E.	Latex Joint Sealant:

2023-06	JOINT SEALANTS	079200 4 of 12

1.	 Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.

F.	Acoustical Joint Sealant:
1.	Acoustical Joint Sealant:	Manufacturer’s standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining lates sealant complying with ASTM C 834.	Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

G.	Joint Sealant Backer Rod:
1.	 General:	Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

H.	 Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants:	Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

I.	 Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

J.	 Suitability for Contact with Food:	Where sealants are used in areas of food preparation, use products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600 and are USDA approved.

K.	 Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2	MANUFACTURERS

A.	Gunnable and Pourable Sealants:
1.	BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems 2.	Bostik Inc.
3.	Pecora Corporation
4.	Tremco Global Sealants

B.	Silicone Sealants:
1.	Bostik Inc., Pure Silicone, 100% Neutral-Cure Silicone
2.	 Pecora Corporation; 890NST Ultra Low Modulus Architectural Silicone Sealant-Class 100
3.	Tremco Global Sealants, Spectrem 3

C.	 Polyurethane Sealants: 1.	Bostik Inc.
2.	 Pecora Corporation; DynaTrol I-XL General Purpose One Part Polyurethane Sealant
3.	Sherwin-Williams Company; Stampede-1/-TX Polyurethane Sealant

2023-06	JOINT SEALANTS	079200 5 of 12

D.	Acrylic Sealants (ASTM C 920): 1.	Tremco Global Sealants
2.	Sherwin-Williams Company; Shermax Urethanized Elastomeric Sealant

E.	 Butyl Sealants: 1.	Bostik Inc.
2.	Pecora Corporation
3.	Tremco Global Sealants

F.	Epoxy Sealants:
1.	Pecora Corporation; Dynapoxy EP-1200 Two-Part Epoxy Security Sealant

G.      Preformed Compressible Foam Sealers: 1.       EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd
2.	Sandell Manufacturing Company, Inc 3.	Dayton Superior Corporation
4.	Tremco Global Sealants

2.3	SEALANTS

A.	 Type Exterior - General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; single component.
1.	Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces. 2.	Applications:
a.	Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. b.	Joints between concrete and other materials.
c.	Joints between metal frames and other materials.
d.	Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. 3.	Polyurethane Products:
a.	 Pecora	Corporation;	DynaTrol	I-XL	General	Purpose	One	Part Polyurethane Sealant
b.	Dymonic: Tremco.
c.	Sikaflex 1a: Sika Corporation.

B.	 Type Metal surfaces - Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring.
1.	Product: BA-98 manufactured by Pecora. 2.	Product: Tremco butyl sealant
3.	Applications:
a.	Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work. b.	Concealed sealant bead in siding overlaps. c.	Bedding door thresholds.

C.	 Type Interior - General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834,Type OP, Grade NF single component, paintable.
1.	Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 2.	Applications:
a.	Interior wall and ceiling control joints.
b.	Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.
c.	Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.

2023-06	JOINT SEALANTS	079200 6 of 12

D.	 D. Type Non-pick - Nonsag Tamper-Resistant Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M, G, and A; single or multi- component.
1.	Type: Polyurethane.
2.	Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces.
3.	Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 4.	Products:
a.	Pecora Corporation; DynaFlex Flexible Polyurethane Security Sealant b.	Pecora Corporation; DynaFlex SC Polyurethane STPU Security Sealant

E.	 Type Bath - Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C920, Uses I, M and A; Single component, mildew resistant.
1.	Applications:
a.	Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces.
b.	Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces. 2.	Products:
a.	Pecora Corporation; 898NST Sanitary Silicone Sealant-Class 50

F.	 Type Acoustic - Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Locations: 1.	Composition: Acrylic latex emulsion sealant.
2.	Applications: Use for concealed locations only:
a.	 Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track and floor.
3.	Products:
a.	Pecora Corporation; AIS-919 Acoustical and Insulation Latex Sealant b.	Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant
c.	Hilti, Inc.; CP 506 Smoke and Acoustical Sealant

G.	 Type Floor - Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, M and A; single component.
1.	Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces. 2.	Applications:
a.	Expansion joints in floors. 3.	Products:
a.	Pecora Corporation; NR-201 Self-Leveling Traffic and Loop Sealant b.	BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems

H.	 Type Traffic - Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C920, Class 25, Uses T, I, M and A; single component.
1.	Color: Color as selected. 2.	Applications:
a.	Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving. 3.	Products:
a.	Pecora Corporation; NR-201 Self-Leveling Traffic and Loop Sealant b.	Sherwin-Williams Company; Stampede 1SL Polyurethane Sealant

I.	 Type Butyl - Butyl Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, A, G, O; single component, solvent release, non-skinning, non-sagging.
1.	Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces. 2.	Products:
a.	Bostik Inc.
b.	Pecora Corporation

2023-06	JOINT SEALANTS	079200 7 of 12

J.	 Type Glazing - Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G, M, O; single component, solvent curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding.
1.	Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

2.4	JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A.	 General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B.	 Cylindrical Sealant Backings:	ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) or Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width to control sealant and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C.	 Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.5	MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A.	 Primer:	Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B.	 Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C.	 Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	EXAMINATION

A.	 Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

B.	Verify that joint baking and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

C.	Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

2023-06	JOINT SEALANTS	079200 8 of 12

3.2	PREPARATION

A.	 Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1.	Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
2.	 Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
3.	 Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a.       Concrete. b.       Masonry.
c.	Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
d.	Exterior insulation and finish systems.

4.	 Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a.       Metal. b.       Glass.
c.	Porcelain enamel.
d.	Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B.	 Joint Priming:	Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience.      Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C.	 Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces as recommended by manufacturer to remove excess alkalinity, unless sealant manufacturer's printed instructions indicate that alkalinity does not interfere with sealant bond and performance. Etch with 5% solution of muriatic acid; neutralize with diluted ammonia solution, rinse thoroughly with water and allow to dry before sealant installation.

D.	 Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

2023-06	JOINT SEALANTS	079200 9 of 12

3.3	INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A.	 General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B.	 Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces.

C.      Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

D.	 Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1.	Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2.	Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3.	 Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.

E.	 Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

F.	 Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1.	Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2.	Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3.	 Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

G.	 Install sealant to depths as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by sealant manufacturer but within the following general limitations, measured at center (thin) section of bead:

1.	 For sidewalks, pavements and similar joints sealed with elastomeric sealants and subject to traffic and other abrasion and indentation exposures, fill joints to a depth equal to 75 percent of joint width, but neither more than 5/8 inch deep nor less than 3/8 inch deep.
2.	 For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not subject to traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 50 percent of joint width, but neither more than 1/2 inch deep nor less than 1/4 inch deep.
3.	 For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealants and caulking compounds, fill joints to a depth in range of 75 to 125 percent of joint width.

H.	 Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1.	Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2023-06	JOINT SEALANTS	079200 10 of 12

2.	 Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3.	 Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.

I.	Acoustical Sealant Installation:	At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations.	Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.4	FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.	Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1.	Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a.	 Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feetof joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.
b.	 Perform 1 test for each 1000 feetof joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation.

2.	 Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

a.	 For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3.	Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a.	Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.
b.	 Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements.
c.	 Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4.	 Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.
5.	 Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

2023-06	JOINT SEALANTS	079200 11 of 12

B.	 Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5	CLEANING

A.	 Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.6	PROTECTION

A.	 Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	JOINT SEALANTS	079200 12 of 12

SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Section.

including Sections,

General and apply to this

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	This Section includes the following:

1.	Interior gypsum board.

B.	Related Sections include, but are not limited to the following:

1.	 Division 07 Section "Insulation" for batt and blanket insulation and vapor retarders installed in assemblies that incorporate gypsum board.
2.	 Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for sealing of penetration at rated walls.
3.	Division 07 Section "Joint Firestopping" for sealing of joints at rated walls.
4.	 Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for metal shaft-wall framing, gypsum shaft liners, and other components of shaft-wall assemblies.
5.	 Division 09 Section “Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.
6.	 Division 09 Section “Tiling” for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile.
7.	Division 09 Section “Painting” for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces.

1.3	SUBMITTALS

A.	See Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” for overall submittal procedures.

B.	 Product Data: Manufacturer’s product data for each type of product indicated or incorporated into the Work.

1.	Include statement of VOC content for any adhesives or sealants.

C.	Samples: For the following products:

1.	 Textured Finishes: Three (3) 48 inch square samples for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work.

2018-43	GYPSUM BOARD	092900 1 of 9

1.4	QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.	 Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. Mockups shall be installed at locations as directed by architect and shall include full walls where practical.

1.	Install mockups for the following:

a.	Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. b.	Each texture finish indicated.

2.	Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.
3.	Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
4.	Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.5	STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.	 Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.

1.6	PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.	 Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B.	 Do not install paper faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C.	 Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1.	 Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2.	 Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1	PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.	 Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies:	For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

2018-43	GYPSUM BOARD	092900 2 of 9

B.	 STC-Rated Assemblies:	For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2	PANELS, GENERAL

A.	 Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

1.	Width: 4 feet.

2.	Length: 8, 10, or 12 feet.

2.3	INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A.	 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.       CertainTeed Corporation. 2.       Georgia-Pacific Gypsum.
3.	National Gypsum Company. 4.	USG Corporation.
5.	American Gypsum Co. 6.	PABCO Gypsum.

B.	 Gypsum	Wallboard:	Provide	gypsum	wallboard	complying	with ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated.

1.	Regular Type:

a.	Thickness: 5/8 inch. b.	Long Edges: Tapered.

2.	Type X:

a.	Thickness: 5/8 inch. b.	Long Edges: Tapered.

3.	 Moisture and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture and mold-resistant core and surfaces.

a.	Products:
1)	CertainTeed Corporation; M2Tech Moisture & Mold Resistant Drywall 2)	National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond XP Gypsum Board
b.	Core: 5/8 inch.
c.	Long Edges: Tapered.
d.	 Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274.

2018-43	GYPSUM BOARD	092900 3 of 9

2.4	METAL ACCESSORIES

A.	Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1.	Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2.	Shapes:

a.	Cornerbead.
b.	LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c.	L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d.	U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e.	Expansion (control) joint.

3.	Dimensions: As indicated on drawings.

2.5	JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A.	General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B.	Joint Tape:

1.	Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

2.	Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C.	 Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1.	 Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2.	 Embedding and First Coat:	For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
3.       Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4.       Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

D.	Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1.	 Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.
2.	Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

2.6	AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A.	 General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B.	 Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

1.	 Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2018-43	GYPSUM BOARD	092900 4 of 9

C.	Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1.	 Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick (20 gage structural and heavier).
2.	 For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

D.	Acoustical Sealant: Non-hardening, non-skinning for use in conjunction with gypsum board.

E.	Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Insulation."

2.7	TEXTURE FINISHES

A.	Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.

1.	Coordinate primers with Division 09 Section “Painting.” 2.	Non-Aggregate Finish: Match existing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	EXAMINATION

A.	 Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B.	 Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C.	Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2	APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM PANELS, GENERAL

A.	Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

B.	 Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C.	 Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D.	 Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on

2018-43	GYPSUM BOARD	092900 5 of 9

opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E.	 Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F.	 Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1.	 Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
2.	Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3.	 Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4 to 3/8-inch wide joints to install sealant.

G.	 Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4 to 1/2-inch wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H.	Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I.	 Install thermal and sound attenuation batt/blanket insulation before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

1.	 Coordinate gypsum panel installation with insulation work specified in Division 07 Section “Insulation.”

3.3	APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A.	Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1.	Regular Type: At vertical and horizontal surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2.	Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies.
3.	Acoustically Enhanced Type: Where required for acoustic-rated assemblies.
4.	 Moisture and Mold-Resistant Type:	At walls of toilet rooms, janitor rooms, kitchen, walls within 2 feet (horizontally) of plumbing fixtures, and other locations as indicated on Drawings.

B.	Single-Layer Application:

1.	 On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.

2018-43	GYPSUM BOARD	092900 6 of 9

2.	 On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) using continuous panels without abutting end joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated design.

a.	 Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.
3.	Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

3.4	INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A.	 General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B.	 Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings and according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C.	Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1.	Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2.	LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3.	L-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges where LC-Bead cannot be used. 4.	U-Bead: Use where indicated.

3.5	FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A.	 General:	Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B.	Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C.	Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D.	 Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1.	 Level 1:	All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound; surface shall be free of excess joint compound; tool marks and ridges are acceptable.

a.	Locations: Concealed areas and areas above ceilings.

2.	 Level 2:	All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and one separate coat of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories; surface shall be free of excess joint compound; tool marks and ridges are acceptable.

2018-43	GYPSUM BOARD	092900 7 of 9

a.	 Locations: Panels that are substrate for applied rigid panels having a thickness not less than 3/8 inches.

3.	 Level 3:	All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two (2) separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories; all joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.

a.	Locations: Not used unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

4.	 Level 4:	All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and Three (3) separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories; all joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.

a.	Locations: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view and painted.
b.	 Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.
c.	 Where suspended ceilings are to be installed, wall finish shall extend not less than 6 inches above the ceiling height.

5.	 Level 5:	All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and Three (3) separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories; a thin skim coat of joint compound or similar material specific for this purpose shall be applied to the entire surface; the surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.

a.	Locations:
1)	B1 – Lobby. 2)	C1 - Gallery.
3)	E7 - Circulation.

b.	 Primer:	Refer to Division 09 “Painting” for product and application requirements.

3.6	APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES

A.	 Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.

B.	 Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.

C.	 Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations.

2018-43	GYPSUM BOARD	092900 8 of 9

3.7	PROTECTION

A.	 Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B.	 Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C.	Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1.	 Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2.	 Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION

2018-43	GYPSUM BOARD	092900 9 of 9

SECTION 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Section.

including Sections,

General and apply to this

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	Section Includes:

1.	Resilient base.
2.	Rubber stair accessories.

B.	Related Sections:

1.	Division 03 Sections “Cast-In-Place Concrete.”
2.	Division 09 Section “Flooring Moisture and Alkalinity Testing.”
3.	Division 09 Sections as applicable to flooring products and systems.

1.3	SUBMITTALS

A.	See Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” for overall submittal procedures.

B.	Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.	Include statement of VOC content for any adhesives or sealants.

C.	Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

D.	Product Schedule: For resilient products.

1.4	QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.	 Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:	As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1.	Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

2023-06	RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES	096513 - 1 of 5

1.5	DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.	 Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.

1.6	PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.	 Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1.	48 hours before installation. 2.	During installation.
3.	48 hours after installation.

B.	 Until	Substantial	Completion,	maintain	ambient	temperatures	within	range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C.	 Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1	RESILIENT BASE

A.	Resilient Base:

1.	 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a.	Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b.	Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. c.	Roppe Corporation, USA.

B.	Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.

1.	Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). 2.	Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous).
3.	Style: Cove (base with toe).

C.	Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D.	Height: 4 inches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

E.	Lengths: Cut lengths, 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F.	Outside Corners: Preformed.

2023-06	RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES	096513 - 2 of 5

G.	Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

H.	 Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of manufacturer’s finishes.

I.	Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of manufacturer’s colors.

2.2	INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A.	 Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds:	Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B.	Adhesives:	Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1.	 Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a.	Cove Base Adhesives: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
b.	 Rubber Floor and Stair Tread Adhesives: VOC content of not more than 60 g/L.

C.	 Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.

D.	 Floor Polish:	Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by resilient stair tread manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	EXAMINATION

A.	 Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1.	 Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.

B.	Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2	PREPARATION

A.	 Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

2023-06	RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES	096513 - 3 of 5

B.	 Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTM F710.

1.	 Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2.	 Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3.	Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 10 pH.
4.	 Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft. (18.6 sq. m), and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas.

a.	Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.
b.	 Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

C.	 Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D.	 Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1.	 Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E.	 Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.3	RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A.	Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B.	Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C.	 Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D.	 Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E.	Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

2023-06	RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES	096513 - 4 of 5

F.	 On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G.	Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

H.	Job-Formed Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.

3.4	CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A.	 Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B.	 Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:

1.	Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2.	Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
3.	 Coordinate Cleaning of resilient base and accessories with cleaning of adjacent floor surfaces.

C.	 Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES	096513 - 5 of 5

SECTION 099100 PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2	SUMMARY

A.	 This Section includes surface preparation and field painting, staining or refinishing of the following:

1.	Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2.	Exposed interior items and surfaces.
3.	 Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.

B.	Related Sections include but are not limited to the following:

1.	 Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section.
2.	 Division 06 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section.
3.	 Division 08 Sections for shop priming of metal doors and frames with primers specified in this Section.
4.	 Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing gypsum board surfaces before aplication of surface textures with primers/sealers specified in this Section.
5.	 Division 21 through 23 Sections for additional requirements for painting of plumbing and mechanical items.
6.	 Division 26 through 28 Sections for addititional requirements for painting of electrical items.

1.3	SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A.	 Unauthorized removal or disconnecting of electrical fixtures, switches, or control devices may result in additional electrical work to comply with energy regulations of governing agencies. Contractor shall be financially responsible with no additional cost to the Owner for additional electrical work due to unauthorized removal or disconnecting of electrical fixtures, swithes, or control devices.

1.4	DEFINITIONS

2023-06	PAINTING	099100 - 1 of 18

A.	 Definitions of gloss levels below are from "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" (hereafter, "MPI Manual").

1.	 Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
2.	 Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
3.	 Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
4.       Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 5.       Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
6.	Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

1.5	SUBMITTALS

A.	 Product Data:	For each type of product.	Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B.	 Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated.

C.	 Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.

1.	 Submit Samples on 8 inch square samples of actual material to be painted or stained. For masonry surfaces, include a mortar joint.
2.	Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3.	Label each coat of each Sample.
4.	Label each Sample for location and application area.

D.	Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1.	 Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2.	VOC content.

1.6	QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.	Applicator Qualifications:	Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance.

B.	 Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

1.7	DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.       Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:

2023-06	PAINTING	099100 - 2 of 18

1.	Product name or title of material.
2.	Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3.	Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4.	Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5.	Thinning instructions.
6.	Application instructions. 7.	Color name and number. 8.	VOC content.

B.	 Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F.

1.	 Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2.	Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.
3.	 Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.

1.8	PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.	Apply paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B.	 Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C.	Protection:

1.	 Cover or otherwise protect finished work of other trades, work not to be painted concurrently, landscaping, and adjacent property from damage.
2.	 When not in use, store paints in designated areas. Keep containers closed. At end of day's work, remove empty containers, paint soaked rags, and debris. Vent fumes. Take precautions to prevent fire.

D.	Sequencing, Scheduling:

1.	 Coordinate removal and replacement of hardware, electrical fixtures and trim, and related work of other Sections.
2.	Stain, prime, back paint, and pre-finish items before installation as required.

E.	Cleaning and Disposal:

1.	Do not use Project plumbing fixtures or piping systems for:

a.	Cleaning painting equipment and utensils.

b.	Disposal of waste from cleaning or disposal of paints.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2023-06	PAINTING	099100 - 3 of 18

2.1	SCHEDULED PAINT SYSTEMS

A.	 Provide paint systems as scheduled in Part 3 Article “Paint Systems” to comply with requirements in this Section.

1.	 Named Manufacturers' Products:	Manufacturer and product designations indicated in the scheduled paint systems are for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements; unless otherwise indicated, paint products are based on products manufactured by the following:

a.	Sherwin Williams.

1)	 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named products or comparable products by one of the following:

a)	Dunn-Edwards Paints. b)	Fuller O’Brien Paints. c)	ICI Paints.
d)	Frazee Paints. e)	Tnemec.

2.2	UNOPEN PAINT FOR OWNER’S FUTURE USE

Provide Five (5) unopend one gallon containers of the Third Coat Material list for Paint System P55.F (Acrolon 100 by Sherwin Williams).

2.3	PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A.	 Material Compatibility: Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

1.       For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B.	 Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified.	Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.

C.	 VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.	 For interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

a.	Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
b.	Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. c.	Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L.

2023-06	PAINTING	099100 - 4 of 18

d.	Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
e.	Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. f.	Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.
g.	Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. h.	Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.
i.	Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
j.	Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.

D.	 Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

E.	 Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect. Colors to be factory mixed and to match approved samples.

F.	Mixing:

1.	Follow manufacturer's printed recommendations. 2.	Mix all paints thoroughly prior to application.
3.	Mix only in Inspector's presence in assigned spaces.
4.	 Except where thinning is specifically recommended by manufacturer, do not thin products.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	EXAMINATION

A.	 Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, requirements for maximum moisture content and other performance of the Work.

for compliance with conditions affecting

B.	 Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates:	When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1.	Concrete: 12 percent.
2.	Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3.	Wood: 15 percent.
4.	Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent. 5.	Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C.	Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.

D.	Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

E.	 Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

2023-06	PAINTING	099100 - 5 of 18

F.	 Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1.	Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

G.	 Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

1.	 Notify the Architect of anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others.

3.2	PREPARATION

A.	 Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B.	 Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1.	 Electrical Items: Remove only switch and outlet cover plates and similar items that do not require disconnecting wiring. Do not disconnect wiring or remove electrical fixtures, swithes, or control devices unless otherwise indicated on Electrical Drawings.

a.	 Contractor may be subject to additional costs due to unautorized removal of items, refer to Part 1 Article “Special Requierments.”

2.	After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C.	 Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1.	 Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
2.	 Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

D.	 Concrete and Masonry Substrates:	Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.	Perform appropriate tests to determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces; testing shall be performed or witnessed by a certified representative of the paint manufacturer. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

1.	 Cracks and defects at concrete and masonry surfaces shall be filled with cement grout; match surface texture.

2023-06	PAINTING	099100 - 6 of 18

2.	 Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.

E.	 Steel Substrates: Clean ungalvanized steel surfaces that have not been shop-primed; remove oil, grease, dirt, rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:

1.	Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC), SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

2.	SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."

F.	 Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

G.	 Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Clean galvanized substrates with nonpetroleum-based solvents to remove oil and surface contaminants.	Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. Prepare surface to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

H.	Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.

I.	 Wood Substrates:	Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required.

1.	 Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated.
2.	Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3.	 Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.

a.	When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
b.	 Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside.
c.	 Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.

4.	After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

J.	 Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.

K.	 Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2023-06	PAINTING	099100 - 7 of 18

1.	 Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2.	 Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.
3.	 Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

L.	 Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

M.	 Drywall: Fill any cracks or defects with drywall joint compound. Sand any rough spots smooth. Do not raise nap on paper covering.

3.3	APPLICATION

A.	 General:	Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual."	Paint/stain exposed surfaces, except where schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted/stained or is to remain natural. If schedules do not specifically mention an item or surface to be painted, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.

1.	Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2.	 Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
3.	 Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames.
4.	 Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
5.	 Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
6.	 Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
7.	 Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
8.	 The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place.	Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.
9.	 Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.

a.	Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:

2023-06	PAINTING	099100 - 8 of 18

1)	Aluminum storefronts and entrances.
2)	Anodized aluminum gypsum board and plaster trim. 3)	Acoustical wall panels.
4)	Toilet and urinal partitions. 5)	Stainless steel items.
6)	Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. 7)	Light fixtures.
8)	Distribution cabinets.

b.	 Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

B.	 Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C.	 If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D.	Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E.	Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

1.	 The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
2.	Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3.	If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply
additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
4.	Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

F.	Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1.	 Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted.

2023-06	PAINTING	099100 - 9 of 18

2.	 Rollers:	Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3.	 Spray Equipment:	Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.

G.	 Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.

H.	 Block Fillers:	Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.

I.	 Prime Coats:	Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

J.	 Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

K.	 Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.

1.	Provide satin finish for final coats.

L.	 Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.

M.	 Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.

N.	 Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:	Paint the following work where exposed to view at applications indicated:

1.	Equipment rooms:

a.	Equipment, including panelboards. b.	Uninsulated metal piping.
c.	Uninsulated plastic piping. d.	Pipe hangers and supports. e.	Metal conduit.
f.	Plastic conduit.
g.	Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
h.	 Ducts, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.

2023-06	PAINTING	099100 - 10 of 18

2.	Occupied areas:

a.	Equipment, including panelboards. b.	Uninsulated metal piping.
c.	Uninsulated plastic piping. d.	Pipe hangers and supports. e.	Metal conduit.
f.	Plastic conduit.
g.	 Ducts, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.
h.	 Interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles.
i.	Other items as directed by Architect.

3.	Exterior locations:

a.	Equipment, including panelboards. b.	Uninsulated metal piping.
c.	Uninsulated plastic piping. d.	Pipe hangers and supports. e.	Metal conduit.
f.	Plastic conduit.
g.	Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.

3.4	CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A.	At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site.

B.	After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C.	 Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D.	 Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes.	Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.

E.	Correction of Defective Work:

1.	 Repair abraded, damaged or incomplete paint surfaces by methods acceptable to Architect. Spot repairs to be well-blended into adjacent work. For large repairs, re-coat entire plane or building element in which damaged area occurs.
2.	 Defaced surfaces of work not to be painted shall be cleaned and their original finish restored.

2023-06	PAINTING	099100 - 11 of 18

F.	At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5	PAINT SYSTEMS

A.	Interior and exterior paint systems shall be as indicated on the following pages.

2023-06	PAINTING	099100 - 12 of 18

B.	Interior Paint Systems:

SURFACE
	PAINT SYSTEM
	COATS
	MANUFACTURER’S DESIGNATION

(1)
	Gypsum Drywall
	P12.A
	Flat, Latex
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B28 B30 B30
	ProMar 200 Zero Primer ProMar 200 Zero ProMar 200 Zero
	
		P12.B
	Semi-Gloss Latex
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B28 B31 B31
	ProMar 200 Zero Primer ProMar 200 Zero ProMar 200 Zero
	
		P12.C
	Eggshell Enamel Latex
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B28 B41 B41
	ProMar 200 Zero Primer ProMar 200 Zero ProMar 200 Zero
	
	(Textured)
	P12.D
	Flat
	One Coat
	A44
	Tuff Surface

(2)
	Wood
	P13.A
	Semi-Gloss Latex
		B28

B31 B31
	Premium Wall & Wood Primer
ProMar 200 Zero ProMar 200 Zero
	
		P13.B
	Eggshell Enamel, Latex
	First Coat

Second Coat Third Coat
	B28

A75 A75
	Premium Wall & Wood Primer
Solo EG Solo EG
	
		P13.C
	Lacquer Satin
	Stain First Coat
Second Coat Third Coat
	
Gemini Wood Classic
	Minwax Wood Stain Sanding Sealer Satin Lacquer
Satin Lacquer
	
		P13.D
	Lacquer Semi-Gloss
	Stain First Coat
Second Coat Third Coat
	
Gemini Wood Classic
	Minwax Wood Stain Sanding sealer Semi-Gloss Lacquer Semi-Gloss Lacquer
	
		P13.E
	Lacquer Gloss
	Stain First Coat
Second Coat Third Coat
	Gemini Wood Classic
	Minwax Wood Stain WoodClassics Gloss Lacquer WoodClassics Gloss Lacquer WoodClassics Gloss Lacquer
	
		P13.F
	Varnish Satin
	Stain First Coat
Second Coat Third Coat
		Minwax Wood Stain WoodClassics Satin Varnish WoodClassics Satin Varnish WoodClassics Satin Varnish
	
		P13.G
	Varnish Semi-Gloss
	Stain First Coat
Second Coat Third Coat
		Minwax Wood Stain Helmsman SG Helmsman SG Helmsman SG

2023-06	PAINTING	099100 - 13 of 18

	MANUFACTURER’S DESIGNATION
	
SURFACE
	PAINT SYSTEM
	COATS
		
(2)
	Wood

Int Structural Steel
	P13I
	Fire Retardant Intumescent Paint (Sheen as selected by Architect)
	First Coat

Second Coat Third Coat
		Water base sealer as recommended by manufacturer
Flame Coat or Bar Flame or approved equal

Firetex 5120
	
(3)
	Ferrous Metal
	P14.A
	Flat Latex
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
t
	B66 B30 B30
	ProCryl
ProMar 200 Zero ProMar 200 Zero
	
		P14.B
	Semi-Gloss Latex
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B66 A77 A77
	ProCryl Solo SG Solo SG
	
		P14.C
	Eggshell Latex
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B66 B20 B20
	ProCryl
ProMar 200 Zero ProMar 200 Zero
	
(4)
	Galvanize d Metal/ Aluminum
	P15.A
	Flat Latex
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B66 B30 B30
	ProCryl
ProMar 200 Zero ProMar 200 Zero
	
		P15.B
	Semi-Gloss Latex
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B66 A77 A77
	ProCryl Solo SG Solo SG
	
		P15.C
	Eggshell Latex
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B66 B41 B41
	ProCryl
ProMar 200 Zero ProMar 200 Zero
	
	Galvanize Metal & Alum. (Interior Hollow Metal Frames)
	P15.D
	Semi-Gloss
	First Coat Second Coat

Third Coat
	B66
	ProCryl Primer
Meoded Metallic (Sapphire Metallic)
Acrolon 100 HS
	
(5)
	Plaster, Concrete, Brick, Stucco
	P16.A
	Flat Latex
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	A24 B30 B30
	Loxon
ProMar 200 Zero ProMar 200 Zero
	
		P16.B
	Semi-Gloss Latex
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	A24 A77 A77
	Loxon Solo SG Solo SG
	
		P16.C
	Eggshell Latex
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	168 B41 B41
	Prime Plus ProMar 200 Zero ProMar 200 Zero
	
(6)
	Concrete Block
	P17.A
	Flat latex
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B25 B30 B30
	PrepRite Block Filler ProMar 200 Zero ProMar 200 Zero

2023-06	PAINTING	099100 - 14 of 18

	MANUFACTURER’S DESIGNATION
	
SURFACE
	PAINT SYSTEM
	COATS
		
		P17.B
	Semi-Gloss Latex
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B25 A77 A77
	PrepRite Block Filler Solo SG
Solo SG
	
		P17.C
	Eggshell Latex
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	262 B41 B41
	PrepRite Block Filler ProMar 200 Zero ProMar 200 Zero
	
(7)
	Acoustical Ceiling Tile/ Plaster
	P18.A
	Latex
	One Coat to Cover
	A21
	Eco Select
	
(8)
	Ceramic Tile like Finishes
	P19.A
		First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B51 B58

B58
	Multi Surface Latex Primer Pro Industrial H20 Based Epoxy
PI H20 Based Epoxy
	
(9)
	Ceiling and Wall w/misc. Pipes & Conduit, attached and Trusses & Beams w/Spray-on Fire Insulation
	P20.A
		One Coat
	B42
	Waterbased Dryfall White or Black
	
(10)
	Misc Drywall
		Dry Erase
	Primer 1st Coat 2nd Coat
	B28 B24
	ProMar 200 Zero
ProMar 200 Zero (any color) SW Dry Erase or Idea Paint via Sherwin Williams

2023-06	PAINTING	099100 - 15 of 18

C.	Exterior Paint Systems:

SURFACE
	FINISH SCHEDULE DESIGNATION
	COATS
	MANUFACTURER’S DESIGNATION
	
(1)
	Plaster, Concrete
	P50.A
	Flat, Acrylic
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B51

A06 A06
	MP (Multi Prurpose) Latex Primer
A-100 A-100
	
		P50.B
	Low Sheen Enamel Acrylic
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B51 A75 A75
	MP Latex Primer Solo EG
Solo EG
	
		P50.C
	Elastomeric (Smooth) 5 yr. labor warranty
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat“ Spray Application”
	B51 A24 A24
	MP Latex Primer Loxon XP
Loxon XP (if needed)
	
	Plaster, Concrete (Base Bid)
	P50.D
	Elastomeric (Medium Aggregate) 5 yr. labor warranty
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B51 A05 A05
	MP Latex Primer Conflex XL Conflex XL
	
(2)
	Concrete Block Masonry
	P51.A
	Flat, acrylic emulsion
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	262 A06 A06
	Block Filler A-100
A-100
	
		P51.B
	Elastomeric Smooth 5 Yr. labor warranty
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B25 A24 A24
	Block Filler Loxon XP
Loxon XP (if needed)
	
		P51.C
	Elastomeric (Medium Aggregate) 5 yr labor warranty
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B51 A05 A05
	MP Latex Primer Conflex XL Medium Conflex XL
	
		P51.D
	Elastomeric (Coarse Aggregate)
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B51 A05 A05
	MP Latex Primer Conflex XL Coarse Conflex XL
	
		P51.E
	Clear Water Repellent 10-yr Warranty
	1 Coat
	SX-7
	H&C Clear Water Repellent
	
(3)
	Wood
	P53.A
	Flat Acrylic Emulsion
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B51 A06 A06
	MP Latex Primer A-100
A-100
	
		P53.B
	Semi-Gloss Acrylic
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B51 A77 A77
	MP Latex Primer Solo SG
Solo SG
	
		P53.C
	Low Sheen Enamel
	First Coat Second Coat
	B51 A75
	MP Latex Primer Solo EG

2023-06	PAINTING	099100 - 16 of 18

	
SURFACE
	FINISH SCHEDULE DESIGNATION
	COATS
	MANUFACTURER’S DESIGNATION
	
			Acrylic
	Third Coat
	A75
	Solo EG
	
(3)
	Wood
	P53.D
	Flat, Stain Water Base Semi-Transparent
	First Coat Second Coat
		Woodscapes Woodscapes
	
		P53.E
	Flat, Stain Opaque
	First Coat Second Coat
		Deckscapes Deskscapes
	
		P53.F
	Varnish Clear Gloss
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	6509 6509 6509
	WoodClassics Varnish WoodClassics Varnish WoodClassics Varnish
	
		P53.G
	Stain and Varnish
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	
6509 6509
	Woodscapes Stain WoodClassics Varnish WoodClassics Varnish
	
(4)
	Ferrous Metal
	P55.D
	Gloss High Perform..
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B66 B65 B65
	ProCryl Primer
HS Polyurethane Gloss HS Polyurethane Gloss
	
		P55.E
	Semi-Gloss High Perform.
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B66 B65 B65
	ProCryl Primer
HS Polyurethane SG HS Polyurethane SG
	
	Ferrous Metal
	P55.F
	High Gloss Water Base Acrylic Urethane
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
		Macroposy 646-100 Acrolon 100 Arcolon 100
	
(5)
	Galvanize Metal & Aluminum
	P56.C
	Gloss High Perform.
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B66 B65 B65
	ProCryl Primer
HS Polyurethane Gloss HS Polyurethane Gloss
	
		P56.D
	Semi-Gloss High Perform.
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B66 B65 B65
	ProCryl Primer
HS Polyurethane SG HS Polyurethane SG
	
		P56.E
	Gloss
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B66 A77 A77
	ProCryl Primer Solo GL
Solo GL
	
	Galvanize Metal & Alum. (Columns and Fins) (Alternate Bid)
	P56.F
	Gloss
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
		Macropoxy 646-100 Acrolon 100 Acrolon 100
	
	Galvanize Metal &
	P56.G
	Semi-Gloss
	First Coat Second Coat
	B66
	ProCryl Primer
Meoded Metallic (Sapphire

2023-06	PAINTING	099100 - 17 of 18

	
SURFACE
	FINISH SCHEDULE DESIGNATION
	COATS
	MANUFACTURER’S DESIGNATION
	
	Alum. (Exterior Hollow Metal Frames)
			
Third Coat
		Metallic) Acrolon 100 HS
	
(6)
	Aluminum
	P58.A
	Flat, Acrylic
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B66 A06 A06
	DTM Primer A-100
A-100
	
		P58.B
	Semi-Gloss Enamel Acrylic
	First Coat Second Coat Third Coat
	B66 A75 A75
	DTM Primer Solo SG Solo SG

END OF SECTION

2023-06	PAINTING	099100 - 18 of 18

SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING

PART 1: - GENERAL

1.1	GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS:

A.	 The General Provisions for Plumbing, Section 22 05 00, shall form a part of this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated here.

1.2	SCOPE:

A.	 Included: Provide all labor, materials and services necessary for complete, lawful and operating systems as shown or noted on the drawings or as specified here. The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

1.	Sanitary sewer system. 2.	Domestic water system.
3.	All equipment as shown or noted on the drawings or as specified.
4.	 Demolition as indicated on drawings. Where demolition is called for, remove all equipment, piping, braces, housekeeping pads, supports and related items no longer required.
5.	 Lead Free: All equipment, fixtures, valves and fixture stops providing water for human consumption installed after January 1, 2010, must meet the “Lead Free” requirements for the State of California.

B.	Work Specified Elsewhere:

1.	 Line voltage power wiring, disconnect switches and installation of all starters are included in the Electrical Section unless otherwise noted.
2.	 Concrete and reinforcing steel unless specifically called for on the drawings or specifications.
3.	Painting unless specifically called for in the drawings or specifications. 4.	Carpentry.

PART 2: - PRODUCTS

2.1	PIPING MATERIALS:

A.	Sanitary Sewer:

1.	 Soil,WasteandVentPiping(Non-Pressurized):Standardweightcoatedcast iron pipe and fittings. Plain end, CISPI 301, ASTM A888, or hub end with rubber gaskets, ASTM A74, ASTM C564. ABI, Tyler, Charlotte. Couplings shall be heavy-duty shielded couplings, Type 304 stainless steel, with neoprene gasket, ASTM C-1540. Husky HD 2000, Clamp-All 80, Mission HeavyWeight. MG Couplings are also acceptable. 2" and smaller exposed to view shall be galvanized steel, ASTM A53, with coated cast iron recessed drainage fittings, ANSI B16.12.

2023-06	PLUMBING	22 00 00 - 1 of 15

Below grade cast iron pipe and fittings shall have 8 mil (minimum) Polyethylene Encasement (Poly Wrap), Per ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5.
2.	 Cleanouts: Comparable models of Josam, Wade, Mifab or Zurn are acceptable. Grease plug prior to installation. Floor Cleanouts: Smith 4023 with nickel bronze top in finished areas; Smith 4223 in utility areas. Wall Cleanouts:Smith4532withstainlesssteelcoverandscrew.PipeCleanouts: Iron body with threaded brass plug. Site cleanouts more than 5’ outside building may be PVC with PVC plug.
3.	 Cleanout Box: Precast reinforced concrete. Cast iron lid marked for service. Christy F8 in foot traffic areas; G5 in roadways. Provide with PVC pipe extension down to top of pipe.

B.	Water:

1.	 Hot and Cold Water Piping: Materials used in the water system, except valves and similar devices, shall be of like material, except where otherwise approved by Engineer and Authority Having Jurisdiction, prior to start of work. For existing water systems of galvanized steel or copper, materials shall match existing.

a.	 Inside Building, Within Five Feet of Building Walls, and All Above Grade:

(1)

-or-	(2)

Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, ASTM A53. 150 psi galvanized malleable iron screwed fittings, ANSI B16.3. Hard temper seamless copper, ASTM B88. Wrought copper fittings,ANSIB16.22.TypeLwithbrazedjoints(1100F,min.). 1-1/2" and smaller above grade may be soldered, lead-free silver solder. All nipples shall be lead-free red brass (85% copper). Above grade fittings may be copper (1/2” to 2”) or bronze (2-1/2” to 4”) press fittings, ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22. EPDM O-rings. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. ProPress.

2.	Valves and Specialties:

a.	Valves:

(1)	 General: Manufacturer's model numbers are listed to complete description. Equivalent models of Crane, Kitz, Milwaukee, Nibco, Stockham, Walworth or Watts are acceptable. All valves of a particular type or for a particular service shall be by the same manufacturer..
(2)	 Gate Valve: 2" and Smaller: All bronze. Non-rising stem. Threaded bonnet. Wedge disk. Malleable iron handwheel. 200 psi CWP. Nibco T-113-LF.
(3)	 Ball Valve: Full port. Lead free brass body, cap, stem, disk and ball. Screwed connection. Lever handle. PTFE seat and stem packing. Min. 400 psi CWP. CSA-US and UL listed. Nibco T-FP-600A-LF.

2023-06	PLUMBING	22 00 00 - 1 of 15

b.	Miscellaneous Specialties:

(1)	 Union: 2" and Smaller: AAR malleable iron, bronze to iron ground seat. 300 psi. Unions for copper piping shall be copperorleadfreecastbronze.Anvil.Size2-1/2"andLarger: Grooved pipe, synthetic gasket, malleable iron housing. EPDM gasket, NSF 61 rated. Victaulic Style 77, Gruvlok.
(2)	 Dielectric Coupling: Insulating union or flange rated for 250 psig. Wilkins DUXL Series.

C.	Miscellaneous Piping Items: 1.	Pipe Support:
a.	 PipeHanger: Steel"J" hanger withsidebolt for piping4" andsmaller; steel clevis hanger for piping 5" and larger. Load and jam nuts. Size and maximum load per manufacturer's recommendation. Felt liner for copper piping. Hanger and rod shall have galvanized finish. B-Line, Anvil, Unistrut.
b.	 Isolating Shield: Galvanized steel shell and reinforcing ribs. 1/4" non-conducting hair felt pad. Pipe hanger in accordance with paragraph above. Increase hanger size per manufacturer's recommendation. B-Line, Semco, Superstrut.
c.	 Construction Channel: 12-gage, 1-5/8" x 1-5/8" galvanized steel channel. Single or multiple section. Self-locking nuts and fittings. B-Line, Anvil, Unistrut.
2.	 Flashing: Vent flashing shall be 4 lb/ft2 lead, 16" sq. flange, length sufficient to be turned down 2" into vent. Oatey. Flashing for other piping through roof shallbeprefabricatedgalvanizedsteelroof jackswith16" sq. flange. Provide clamp-onstormcollarandsealwatertightwithmastic.Forcoldprocessbuilt-up roof, material shall be 4 lb/ft2 lead instead of galvanized steel. For single-ply roofing, usetheroofing manufacturer’srecommendedflashingmaterial.

2.2	PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS:

A.	 General: All piping insulation materials shall have fire and smoke hazard ratings as testedunderASTME-84andUL723notexceedingaflamespreadof25andsmoke developed of 50.

B.	 Pre-Molded Fiberglass: Heavy density sectional pre-molded fiberglass with vapor barrier laminated all service jacket and pressure sealing vapor barrier lap. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.25 Btu-in/hr-ft2-F at a mean temperature of 50F. Perm rating 0.02, ASTM E96. Puncture rating 50 Beach units, ASTM D781. Provide 3" (min.) wide tape of same material as lap for butt joints. For hot water piping to 140°F, thickness shall be 1" for pipe sizes less than 1”; 1-1/2" thickness for pipe sizes 1" and 1-1/2”; 2” thickness for 2” and larger. See Title 24, Part 6 “California Energy	Code”	for	temperatures	above	140°F.	Knauf,	Johns-Manville, Owens-Corning.

C.	 Fiberglass Blanket: Unfaced. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.25 Btu-in/hr-ft2-F at a mean temperature of 50F. 1-1/2" thickness. Knauf, Johns-Manville, Owens-Corning.

2023-06	PLUMBING	22 00 00 - 1 of 15

D.	 PVC Jacket (for pipe, fittings and valves): Pre-molded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jackets, 0.020" thickness. Size to match application. Provide solvent weld adhesive and PVC vapor barrier pressure sealing tape by same manufacturer. Zeston.

E.	 Vapor Barrier Coating: Childers CP-34, Foster 30-65. Permeance shall be 0.08 perms or less at 45 mils dry as tested by ASTM F1249.

F.	Aluminum Jacketing: Aluminum pipe and fitting jacketing. 0.016" thickness for straight pipe. 0.024" thickness for fittings. Stucco-embossed finish. Integral moisture barrier. Provide pre-fabricated aluminum strapping and seals by same manufacturer. Childers.

G.	Outdoor Weather Barrier Mastic: Childers CP-10/11, Foster 46-50.

H.	Metal Jacketing/Flashing Sealant: Childers CP-76, Foster 95-44.

I.	 Insulating Tape: Ground virgin cork and synthetic elastomeric. Black, odorless, and non-toxic. K factor 0.43 Btu-in/hr-ft2-F or less. Non-shrinking. For outdoor use, provide protective finish by same manufacturer. Halstead.

J.	 Molded Closed Cell Vinyl (Piping Insulation Under Lavatories and Sinks): Fully molded closed cell vinyl, 1/8” thick, minimum. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 1.17 BTU-in/hr-ft2-ºF at an average temperature of 73ºF. Weep hole in cleanout nut enclosure. Hinged cap over valve to allow access for servicing. Out of sight nylon fastening system and internal ribs on drain insulation to provide air gap (Lav-Guard Only). Truebro Lav-guard, McGuire Pro Wrap, Plumberex.

2.3	FIXTURES:

A.	 General: Provide rough-in for and install all plumbing fixtures shown on drawings. Except in equipment rooms, all trim, valves and piping not concealed in wall structure, above ceiling or below floors, shall be brass with polished chrome plate finish,unlessnotedotherwise.Allenameledfixturesshallbeacidresisting.Standard color is white unless otherwise noted.

B.	 Schedule: Refer toPlumbingFixtureScheduleonthedrawingsfor list of fixturesand trim. Manufacturer's model numbers are listed to complete description. Equivalent models of American Standard, Eljer, Elkay, Haws, Just, Kohler, Moen, T&S Brass, or Willoughby are acceptable. For drainage fixtures, equivalent models of Josam, Mifab, Smith, Wade or Watts are acceptable.

C.	 Stops and P-Traps: All fixtures shall be provided with stops and P-Traps as applicable. Wall mounted faucets, valves, etc. shall have integral stops or wall mounted stops.

1.	 Stops: All hot and cold water supplies shall be 1/2" I.P.S. inlet angle stops with stuffing box, loose key lock shield, and brass riser (3/8" for 2-1/2 gpm and less, otherwise 1/2"). ¼ turn ball stops do not require stuffing box. Dahl, McGuire, Speedway.
2.	 P-Traps: Semi-cast brass, ground joint. 17-gage. Clean-out plug. Unobstructed waterway. California Tubular, McGuire.

2023-06	PLUMBING	22 00 00 - 1 of 15

D.	 Caulking: Caulk fixtures with white G.E. "Sanitary SCS1700", mildew resistant silicone sealant with EPA listed anti-microbial.

2.4	EQUIPMENT:

A.	General Requirements:

1.	 Capacity: Capacities shall be in accordance with schedules shown on drawings. Capacities are to be considered minimum.
2.	 Dimensions: Equipment must conformtospacerequirementsandlimitations as indicated on drawings and as required for operation and maintenance. Equipment will not be accepted that does not readily conform to space conditions. Prepare and submit layout drawings for all proposed equipment (different than scheduled units) showing actual job conditions, required clearances for proper operation, maintenance, etc.
3.	 Ratings - Electrical: Electrical equipment shall be in accordance with NEMA standards and UL or ETL listed where applicable standards have been established.
4.	 Piping: Each item or assembly of items shall be furnished completely piped for connection to services. Control valves and devices shall be provided. Equipment requiring domestic water for non-potable use shall be provided with backflow preventer acceptable for intended use by local governing authorities.
5.	Electrical:

a.	 General: Each item or assembly of items shall be furnished completelywiredtoindividualterminalblocksfor connectiontosingle branch electrical circuit. All electrical accessories and controls required by equipment shall be furnished. Provide terminal blocks for controls and interlocks not included in equipment package. Controllers and other devices shall be in NEMA 1 or 3R enclosures as applicable.
b.	 Wiring: Conductors, conduit, and wiring shall be in accordance with Electrical Specifications. Individual items within assembly shall be separatelyprotectedwith deadfront, fuseddisconnect, fuseblock, or circuit breaker for each ungrounded conductor, all accessible on operating side of equipment. Switches, contacts and other devices shall be in ungrounded conductors.
c.	 ControlVoltage:Equipmentconnectedtogreaterthan240voltsshall be provided with 120 volt control circuit from integral protected transformer if separate source is not indicated on plans. 240 volt control is acceptable if confined within control panel.
d.         Submittals: Included in shop drawings shall be internal wiring diagrams and manufacturer's recommended external wiring.

PART 3: - EXECUTION

3.1	PIPING INSTALLATION:

A.	General:

2023-06	PLUMBING	22 00 00 - 1 of 15

1.	 Piping Layout: Piping shall be concealed in walls, above the ceilings, or below grade unless otherwise noted. Exposed piping shall run parallel to room surfaces; location to be approved by Architect. No structural member shall be weakened by cutting, notching, boring or otherwise, unless specificallyallowedbystructuraldrawingsand/or specifications. Wheresuch cutting is required, reinforcement shall be provided as specified or detailed. All piping shall be installed in a manner to ensure unrestricted flow, eliminate air pockets, prevent any unusual noise, and permit complete drainage of the system. All piping shall be installed to permit expansion and contraction without strain on piping or equipment. Vertical lines shall be installed to allow for building settlement without damage to piping. Pipe sizes indicated on the drawings are nominal sizes unless otherwise noted.
2.	Joints:

a.	 Threaded: Pipe shall be cut square and reamed to full size. Threads shall be in accordance with ANSI B2.1. Joint compound or tape suitableforconveyedfluidshallbeappliedtomalethreadonly.Joints shall be made with three threads exposed.
b.	 Brazed: Filler rod shall be of suitable or the same alloy as pipe. Brazing filler metal shall have a minimum melting point of 1100F. Brazing shall be performed by a Certified Brazer as certified by an organization/institution that uses standards recognized by the AmericanWeldingSociety(AWS) andmeetstherequirementsof the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code, Section 9.
c.	 Open Ends: Open ends of piping shall be capped during progress of work to preclude foreign matter.
d.	 Electrical Equipment: Piping shall not be run over electrical panels, motor control centers or switchboards.

3.	Fittings and Valves:

a.	 Standard Fittings: All joints and changes in direction shall be made with standard fittings. Close nipples shall not be used.
b.	 Reducers: Pipe size reduction shall be made with bell reducer fittings. Bushings shall not be used.
c.	 Unions: A union shall be installed on the leaving side of each valve, at all sides of automatic valves, at equipment connections, and elsewhere as necessary for assembly or disassembly of piping.
d.	 Valves: All valves shall be full line size. Provide shut-off valve for eachbuildingandeachequipmentconnection.Provideshut-offvalve at each point of connection to existing piping. At equipment connections, valves shall be full size of upstream piping.
e.	 Valve Accessibility: All valves shall be located so that they are easily accessible.Valveslocatedaboveceilingsshallbeinstalledwithin24" of the ceiling.

4.	Pipe Support:

a.         General: Hangers shall be placed to support piping without strain on joints or fittings. Maximum spacing between supports shall be as

2023-06	PLUMBING	22 00 00 - 1 of 15

specified below. Actual spacing requirements will depend on structural system. Side beam clamps shall be provided with retaining straps to secure the clamp to the opposite side of the beam. Vertical piping shall be supported with riser clamp at 20' on center (maximum). Support pipe within 12" of all changes in direction. Support individual pipes with pipe hanger. Copper piping systems which protrude through a surface for connection to a fixture stop or other outlet shall be secured with a drop ell, Nibco 707-3-5, to a Holdrite Model #SB1 bracket; nipple through surface shall be threaded brass.

(1)	Pressure Pipe:
Maximum Spacing* Pipe Size (Inches)	Between Supports (ft.)
Copper	Sch. 40 steel 1/2	6                      6
3/4                                            6                      8 1                                               6                      8 1-1/4                                         6                     10 1-1/2                                         6                     10 2                                               10                   10 2-1/2                                         10                   10 3                                               10                   10 4                                               10                   10 6                                               10                   10
*Based on straight lengths of pipe with couplings only. Provide additional supports for equipment, valves or other fittings. Seismic requirements may reduce maximum spacing.
(2)	 Gravity Drain Pipe: Piping shall be supported at each length of pipe or fitting, but in no case at greater spacing than indicated above for pressure pipe.

b.	 Hot and Cold Water Piping: All hot and cold water piping shall have isolating shield; no portion of this piping shall touch the structure withoutanisolatingshieldexceptatanchorpointsforfixturerough-in.
c.	 Trapeze: Trapeze hangers of construction channel and pipe clamps may be used. Submit design to Engineer for review.

5.	Miscellaneous:

a.	 Escutcheons: Provide chrome plated metal escutcheons where piping penetrates walls, ceilings, or floors in finished areas.
b.	 Pipe Sleeves: All piping passing through concrete shall be provided with pipe sleeves. Allow 1" annular clearance between sleeve and pipe for piping 3" and smaller, otherwise 2" annular clearance.
c.	 Pipes Passing through Fire Rated Surfaces: Pipes passing through fire rated walls, floors, ceilings, partitions, etc. shall have the annular space surrounding the pipe or pipe insulation sealed with fire rated materials in accordance with the requirements of 2022 CBC Section 714.

2023-06	PLUMBING	22 00 00 - 1 of 15

d.	 Dielectric Couplings: Dielectric couplings shall be installed wherever piping of dissimilar metals are joined, except that bronze valves may be installed in ferrous piping without dielectric couplings.

B.	Sanitary Sewer Piping:

1.	 General: Where inverts are not indicated, sanitary sewer piping shall be installed at 1/4" per foot pitch. Piping 4" and larger may be installed at 1/8" per foot pitch where structural or other limitations prevent installation at a greater pitch. Bell and spigot piping shall be installed with barrel on sand bed; excavate hole for bell.
2.	 Cleanouts: Install cleanouts at ends of lines, at changes of direction greater than 45 degrees, and at not greater than 100 foot intervals. Locate interior cleanouts in accessible locations and bring flush to finished surface.
3.	 Vents: Ventsshallterminatenot lessthan6"above theroof nor lessthan12" from any vertical surface nor within 10' of any outside air intake. Install horizontal vent lines at 1/4" per foot pitch. Offset vents 2' minimum from gutters, parapets, ridges and roof flashing.

C.	 Water Piping: Connections to branches and risers shall be made from top of main. Supply header in fixture battery shall be full size to last fixture, reducing in size only on individual connections to each fixture in battery. Minimum pipe size shall be 1/2", unless otherwise noted. Exposed fixture stops and flush valves shall be installed with brass nipples for copper piping and galvanized nipples for galvanized piping. Nipples are to extend from outside of wall to fitting at header or drop behind finish wall surfaces. Pipe nipples shall be same size as stop or flush valve. Provide shut off for each building and each connection to equipment. Shock absorbers shall be installed in a vertical position as indicated on drawings. Only equipment mounted on vibration isolators shall be connected with flexible connections. Underground hot water and cold water piping which run parallel to each other shall be installed a minimum of 3 feet apart.

3.2	PIPING INSULATION INSTALLATION:

A.	Domestic Hot Water:

1.	 General: All domestic hot water piping, fittings and accessories shall be insulated.
2.	 Pipe: Apply pre-molded fiberglass sections to pipe using integral pressure sealing lap adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Stagger longitudinal joints. Seal butt joints with factory supplied pressure sealing tape.
3.	Fittings and Valves:

a.	 Wrap all fittings and valves with pre-cut fiberglass blanket to thickness matching adjoining insulation. Cover blanket with PVC jacket in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Solvent weld. Seal all joints with factory supplied pressure sealing vapor barrier tape with 1-1/2" (min.) overlap on both sides of joint. Insulate valvestostem.Donotinsulateunions,flangesorvalvesunlesswater temperature exceeds 140F or the piping is exposed to weather.

2023-06	PLUMBING	22 00 00 - 1 of 15

b.	 For miscellaneousfittings andaccessoriesforwhichPVCjacketsare not available or where proximity of fittings precludes a neat-appearing installation, the Contractor may cover the fiberglass blanket with stretchable glass fabric, one coat of lagging adhesive and a final coat of vapor barrier coating. All exposed ends of insulation shall be adequately sealed.

4.	 Additional Finish for Exposed Piping and Equipment: All piping and equipment exposed to view but protectedfrom theweather shall be given an additional finish of PVC jackets.

B.	 Cold Water Piping-Freeze Protection: All cold water piping exposed to weather or other areassubject tofreezing (i.e. ventilated attics, uninsulated exterior soffits, etc.) shall be insulated same as hot water piping. Cover with aluminum jacketing where exposed to weather. Short lengths of pipe and valves may be wrapped with insulating tape, 50% overlap. Cover valves to stem. Apply at least two coats of protective finish where exposed to weather.

C.	 Piping Insulation Under Lavatories and Sinks: Exposed water piping, water stops and drain piping under accessible lavatories and sinks shall be insulated with 1/8" thickmoldedclosedcellvinyl. Installationshallbeinaccordancewithmanufacturer's instructions.

3.3	FIXTURE INSTALLATION:

A.	Fixture Height: Shall be as indicated on Architectural drawings.

B.	 Floor Drainsor Floor Sinks: Shallbeplacedparallel toroomsurfaces,set level, flush withfloor,andadjustedtoproperheighttodrain.Coveropeningsduringconstruction to keep all foreign matter out of drain line.

C.	 Wall Hung Fixtures: Shall be provided with proper backing and hanger plates secured to wall. Fixtures mounted on carriers shall bear against stop nuts, clear of wall surface. Caulk fixtures against walls with white G.E. "Sanitary SCS1700" silicone sealant. Caulking shall be smooth and flush with fixture surface (not concave).

D.	 Floor Mounted Fixtures: Shall be provided with proper support plates. Caulk floor mounted fixtures with white G.E. "Sanitary SCS1700" silicone sealant. Caulking shall be smooth and flush with fixture surface (not concave).

E.	 Other Connections: Rough-in and connection for trim or fixtures supplied by others shall be included in this specification section.

3.4	EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION:

A.	 General: It shallbetheresponsibilityof theequipment installer toinsurethat nowork done under other specification sections shall in any way block, or otherwise hinder the equipment. All equipment shall be securely anchored in place.

2023-06	PLUMBING	22 00 00 - 1 of 15

B.	 Connections to Equipment: Where size changes are required for connections to equipment, they shall be made immediately adjacent to the equipment and, if possible, inside the equipment cabinet.

3.5	TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS:

A.	 General: Unless otherwise directed, tests shall be witnessed by a representative of the Architect. Work to be concealed shall not be enclosed until prescribed tests are made. Should any work be enclosed before such tests, the Contractor shall, at his expense, uncover, test and repair all work to original conditions. Leaks and defects shown by tests shall be repaired and entire work retested. Tests may be made in sections, however, all connections between sections previously tested and new section shall be included in the new test.

B.	Gravity Systems:

1.	 Sanitary Sewer: All ends of the sanitary sewer system shall be capped and linesfilledwithwatertothetopofthehighestvent,10'abovegrademinimum. This test shall be made before any fixtures are installed. Test shall be maintained until all joints have been inspected, but no less than 2 hours.

C.	Pressure Systems:

1.	 General: There shall be no drop in pressure during test except that due to ambient temperature changes. All components of system not rated for test pressure shall be isolated from system before test is made.
2.	 Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping: Maintain 100 psig water pressure for 4 hours.

D.         Fixtures: Provide torque testing of water closet carrier anchor bolts in presence of Inspector. If Inspector is not available, a testing agency shall handle the inspection.

3.6	DISINFECTION:

A.	 Disinfect all domestic water piping systems in accordance with 2022 CPC Section 609.10, and in accordance with administrative authority. Disinfection process shall be performed in cooperation with health department having jurisdiction and as required by applicable codes in presence of Inspector of Record (IOR). During procedure signs shall be posted at each water outlet stating, "Chlorination - Do Not Drink". Contractor shall notify the IOR 48 hours prior to the need for testing so the IOR can make arrangements for the testing laboratory to collect samples and test the water. Samples shall be taken at the furthest point of each building. Contractor shall obtain a copy of the test results from the Testing laboratory and shall provide copies to the Architect, IOR and Owner before project completion. If the water fails the bacteriological test, Contractor shall disinfect the piping again and pay for any retesting required, at no additional cost to owner. Contractor shall include copy of Bacteriological Test Results at closeout with operation and maintenance manuals.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	PLUMBING	22 00 00 - 1 of 15

SECTION 22 05 00
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1: - GENERAL

1.1	GENERAL CONDITIONS:

A.	 The preceding General and Special Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01 requirements shall form a part of this Section with the same force and effect as thoughrepeatedhere.Theprovisionsof thisSectionshallapplytoalloftheSections of Division 22 of these Specifications and shall be considered a part of these sections.

1.2	CODES AND REGULATIONS:

A.	All work and materials shall be in full accordance with current rules and regulations of all applicable codes. Nothing in these Drawings or Specifications is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. Should the Drawings or Specifications call for material or methods of construction of a higher quality or standard than required by these codes, the Drawings and Specifications shall govern. Applicable codes and regulations include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following:

1.	California Code of Regulations (CCR):

a.	Title 8, Industrial Relations
b.	Title 24, Part 1, Administrative Regulations
c.	Title 24, Part 6, California Energy Code, 2022 Edition
d.	Title 24, Part 11, California Green Building Code, 2022 Edition

2.	California Building Code - CBC - 2022
3.	California Mechanical Code - CMC - 2022 4.	California Plumbing Code - CPC - 2022 5.	California Fire Code - CFC - 2022
6.	California Electrical Code - CEC - 2022 7.	Air Diffusion Council - ADC
8.	American National Standards Institute - ANSI
9.	 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers - ASHRAE
10.	American Society of Mechanical Engineers - ASME 11.	American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM 12.	American Water Works Association - AWWA
13.	Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute - CISPI
14.	National Electrical Manufacturers Association - NEMA 15.	National Fire Protection Association - NFPA
16.	National Sanitation Foundation - NSF
17.	Occupational Safety and Health Act - OSHA 18.	Plumbing and Drainage Institute - PDI
19.	Underwriters' Laboratory - UL

2023-06	GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING	22 05 00 - 1 of 15

1.3	PERMITS AND FEES:

A.	 The Contractor shall take out all permits and arrange for all tests in connection with his work as required. All charges are to be included in the work. Permits for equipment connected toa particular system are tobe considered as part of the work included under each system. All charges or fees for service connections, meters, etc. shall be included in the work.

1.4	COORDINATION OF WORK:

A.	 Layout of materials, equipment and systems is generally diagrammatic unless specifically dimensioned. Some work may be shown offset for clarity. The actual locations of all materials, piping, ductwork, fixtures, equipment, supports, etc. shall be carefully planned prior to installation of any work in order to avoid all interference with each other, or with structural, electrical, architectural or other elements. Verify the proper voltage and phase of all equipment with the electrical plans. If discrepancies are discovered between drawing and specification requirements, the more stringent requirement shall apply. All conflicts shall be called to the attention of the Architect and the Engineer prior to the installation of any work or the ordering of any equipment. No work shall be prefabricated or installed prior to this coordination. No costs will be allowed to the Contractor for any prefabrication or installation performed prior to this coordination.

B.	Mandatory Coordination and Shop Drawings:

1.	 Prepare or have prepared high level detailed Shop Drawings in plan view, with cross-sections as necessary, indicating the proposed installation plan for all HVAC, mechanical, fire sprinkler, and plumbing installations for the project. These Drawings should depict actual elevations and linear dimensions, as well as all routing changes, transitions, major offsets, deck andstructuralattachmentsdeemednecessarytoaccomplishtheinstallation. Individual Shop Drawings maybe preparedfor each trade working within the designated space or area; however, the coordination of the consolidated installation shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor. These Shop Drawings shall be provided to each Subcontractor having Work in each area for coordination. Any fittings, offsets or other changes due to coordination shall be at no additional cost to District.
2.	 Whereas the Drawings are diagrammatic, showing only the general arrangement of the systems, Contractor shall have responsibility for the fitting of materials and equipment to other parts of the equipment and structure, and to make adjustments as necessary or required to resolve space problems, preserve service room, and avoid architectural and structuralelementsandtheWorkofothertrades.Contractormayberequired to identify certain areas to relocate installations within the spaces depicted on the Drawings, e.g., ductwork and/or piping may be shifted within the space shown to accommodate other systems. Such functional relocations shall not be deemed a change to the requirements of the Contract. In the event a major re-routing of a system appears necessary, Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval, Shop Drawings of the proposed rearrangement.

2023-06	GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING	22 05 00 - 1 of 15

3.	 Because of the diagrammatic nature and small scale of the Drawings, all necessary offsets, adjustments, and transitions required for the complete installation are not shown. Contractor shall carefully investigate the conditions affecting all the Work and shall arrange such Work accordingly, furnishingsuchfittings, equipment, valves, accessories, offsets, etc., asmay be required, regardless of size or cost, to meet such conditions, at no additional cost to the Owner.
4.	 Coordination changes are not design changes and shall be provided at no additional cost to Owner. Any guidance, drawing or clarification issued by the Architect or Engineer to assist the Contractor or their sub-contractors in their coordination during construction are not design changes and shall be provided at no additional cost to Owner.
5.	 Resolve differences or disputes between subcontractors and materials suppliers concerning coordination, interference, or extent of work between sections. The Contractor's decisions, if consistent with the Contract Documents, shall be final. The Architect and their Consultants are not required to coordinate work between sections and will not do so. Any changes required that affect the design intent shall be presented to and approved by the Architect and Engineer of Record.
6.	 The coordinated Shop Drawings must be signed off by HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Sprinkler, Electrical, Framing, Ceiling Installation, and Data and Low Voltage Subcontractors.
7.	 The signed off Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative for review and approval prior to commencement of installation.
8.	 Provide reviewed Shop Drawings to each Subcontractor having Work in each area.

1.5	GUARANTEE:

A.	 GuaranteeshallbeinaccordancewiththeGeneralConditions.TheseSpecifications may extend the period of the guarantee for certain items. Where such extensions arecalledfor,orwhereitemsarenormallyprovidedwithguaranteeperiodsinexcess of that called for in the General Conditions, the certificate of guarantee shall be furnishedtotheOwnerthroughtheArchitect.Equipmentthatisstartedandoperated prior to acceptance shall have the guarantee extended to cover that period. Owner guarantee shall start at acceptance.

1.6	QUIETNESS:

A.	 Piping, ductwork and equipment shall be arranged and supported so that vibration is a minimum and is not transmitted to the structure.

1.7	DAMAGES BY LEAKS:

A.	 The Contractor shall be responsible for damages caused by leaks in the temporary or permanent piping systems prior to completion of work and during the period of the guarantee, and for damages caused by disconnected pipes or fittings, and the overflow of equipment prior to completion of the work.

1.8	EXAMINATION OF SITE:

2023-06	GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING	22 05 00 - 1 of 15

A.	 TheContractor shall examinethesite, compareit withPlansand Specifications, and shall have satisfied himself as to the conditions under which the work is to be performed. No allowance shall subsequently be made in his behalf for any extra expense to which he may be put due to failure or neglect on his part to make such an examination.

1.9	COMPATIBILITY WITH EXISTING SYSTEMS:

A.	Any work which is done as an addition, expansion or remodel of an existing system shall be compatible with that system.

1.10	MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:

A.	 Materials and equipment shall be new unless otherwise noted. Materials and equipment of a given type shall be by the same manufacturer. Materials and equipment shall be free of dents, scratches, marks, shipping tags and all defacing features at time of project acceptance. Materials and equipment shall be covered or otherwise protected during construction as required to maintain the material and equipment in new factory condition until project acceptance.

1.11	SUBMITTALS:

A.	 Shop Drawings: Within 30 days of contract award, the Contractor shall submit six copies of shop drawings for all materials, equipment, etc. proposed for use on this project (this includes deferred approval items). Material or equipment shall not be ordered or installed until written review is processed by the Engineer. Any item omitted from the submittal shall be provided as specified without substitution.
All shop drawings must comply with the following:

1.	 Shop drawings are required for all material and equipment items and shall include manufacturer's name and catalog numbers, dimensions, capacities, performance curves, and all other characteristics and accessories as listed inthespecificationsoronthedrawings.Descriptiveliteratureshallbecurrent factory brochures and submittal sheets. Capacities shall be certified by the factory. FAX submittals are not acceptable.
2.	 Allshopdrawingsshallbesubmittedatonetimeinaneatandorderlyfashion in a suitable binder with title sheet including Project, Engineer and Contractor, table of contents, and indexed tabs dividing each group of materials or item of equipment. All items shall be identified by the specification paragraph number for which they are proposed. All equipment shall also be identified by the mark number as indicated on drawings.
3.	 Allcapacities, characteristics, andaccessoriescalledforinthespecifications or on the drawings shall be high-lighted, circled or underlined on the shop drawings. Calculations and other detailed data indicating how the item was selected shall be included for items that are not scheduled. Data must be complete enough to permit detailed comparison of every significant characteristic which is specified, scheduled or detailed.
4.	 Drawingsshallbesubmittedinbothhardcopyandelectronicform,electronic files shall be in their native format (i.e. DWG for AutoCAD, RVT for Revit, etc).

2023-06	GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING	22 05 00 - 1 of 15

5.	 Electronic Submittals: Where allowed by Division 01, electronic submittals are acceptable providing the following requirements are met. Electronic submittals which do not comply with these requirements will be rejected.

a.	 Submittal shall be in PDF format, with bookmarks for table of contents and each tab, and sub-bookmarks for each item.
b.	All text shall be searchable (except text that is part of a graphic).
c.	 Submittal shall include all items noted in 1 through 3 above, except a binder is not required.
d.	 Electronic submittals shall be processed through normal channels. Do not submit directly to the Engineer unless the Engineer is the prime consultant for the project.
e.	 Contractor shall provide Owner and Owner’s Representative with hard copies of the final submittal. Coordinate exact number required with Owner through Architect/Engineer.

B.	 Substitutions: Manufacturers and model numbers listed in the specifications or on the drawings represent the standard of quality and features desired (where equipment is scheduled on the drawings, any equipment submitted other than scheduled equipment is considered a substitution). Unless otherwise noted, alternate manufacturers may be submitted for review by the Engineer. Calculations and other detailed data indicating how the item was selected shall be included. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility that substituted items or procedures will meet the specifications and job requirements and shall be responsible for the cost of redesign and modifications to the work caused by these items. At the Engineer's request, furnish locations where equipment similar to the substituted equipment is installed and operating along with the user's phone numbers and contact person. Satisfactory operation and service history will be considered in the acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution.

C.	 Review: Submittals will be reviewed for general conformance with the design concept, but this review does not guarantee quantity shown, nor does it supersede the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all materials, equipment and installation in accordance with the drawings and specifications. The Contractor shall agree that shop drawing submittals processed by the Engineer are not Change Orders; that the purpose of shop drawing submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. The Contractor shall agree that if deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between shop drawings and design drawings and specifications are discovered either prior to or after shop drawing submittals are processed by the Engineer, thedesign drawings and specifications shall control and shall be followed. If a resubmittal is required, submit a complete copy of the Engineer's review letter requiring such with the resubmittal.

1.12	MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS:

A.	All material, equipment, devices, etc., shall be installed in accordance with the recommendationsof themanufacturer of theparticular item. TheContractor shall be responsibleforallinstallationscontrarytothemanufacturer'srecommendations.The

2023-06	GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING	22 05 00 - 1 of 15

Contractor shall make all necessary changes and revisions to achieve such compliance. Manufacturer's installation instructions shall be delivered to and maintained at the job site through the construction of the project.

1.13	SCHEDULING OF WORK:

A.	All work shall be scheduled subject to the review of the Architect, Engineer and the Owner. No work shall interfere with the operation of the existing facilities on or adjacent to the site. The Contractor shall have at all times, as conditions permit, a sufficient force of workmen and quantity of materials to install the work contracted for as rapidly as possible consistent with good work, and shall cause no delay to other Contractors engaged upon this project or to the Owner.

1.14	OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING:

A.	 The locations and dimensions for openings through walls, floors, ceilings, foundations, footings, etc. required to accomplish the work under this Specification Division shall be provided under this Division. Except as noted below, the actual openings and the required cutting and patching shall be provided by other Divisions. Coring through existing concrete or masonry walls, floors, ceilings, foundations, footings, etc., and saw cutting of concrete floors or asphaltic concrete required to accomplish the work under this Specification Division shall be provided under this Division. Patching of these surfaces shall be provided by other Divisions. Cutting or coring shall not impair the strength of the structure. Any damage resulting from this workshallberepairedattheContractor'sexpensetothesatisfactionoftheArchitect.

1.15	EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL:

A.	 General: Barrel of pipe shall have uniform support on sand bed. Sand shall be free from clay or organic material, suitable for the purpose intended and shall be of such size that 90 percent to 100 percent will pass a No. 4 sieve and not more than 5 percent will pass a No. 200 sieve. Unless otherwise noted, minimum earth cover above top of pipe or tubing outside building walls shall be 24", not including base and paving in paved areas.

B.	 Excavation:Widthoftrenchesattopofpipeshallbeminimumof16",plustheoutside diameter of the pipe. Provide all shoring required by site conditions. Where over excavation occurs, provide compacted sand backfill to pipe bottom. Where groundwater is encountered, remove to keep excavation dry, using well points and pumps as required.

C.	Backfill:

1.	 6" Below, Around, and to 12" Above Pipe: Material shall be sand. Place carefully around and on top of pipe, taking care not to disturb piping, consolidate with vibrator. Native soil may be used where allowed by Geotechnical (Soils) Report. Where native soil is used, trenching for gravity drain pipe shall be done using a laser-level and trencher.
2.	 One Foot Above Pipe to Grade: Material shall be sandy or silty loam, free of lumps, laid in 6" layers, uniformly mixed to proper moisture and compacted to required density. If backfill is determined to be suitable and required

2023-06	GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING	22 05 00 - 1 of 15

compactionisdemonstratedbylaboratorytest,watercompactionin6"layers may be used, subject to review by Engineer.

D.	 Compaction: Compact to density of 95% within building and under walkways, driveways, traffic areas, paved areas, etc. and to 90% elsewhere. Demonstrate proper compaction by testing at top, bottom and one-half of the trench depth. Perform these tests at three locations per 100' of trench.

1.16	PROTECTIVE COATING FOR UNDERGROUND PIPING:

A.	Allferrouspipebelowgrade(except cast iron) shallhaveafactoryappliedprotective coating of extruded high density polyethylene, 35 to 70 mils total thickness, X-Tru-Coat, Scotchkote. All fittings and areas of damaged coating shall be covered with two layer double wrap of 10 mil polyvinyl tape to total thickness of 40 mils. Johns-Manville. Protective coating shall be extended 6" above surrounding grade.

1.17	ACCESS DOORS:

A.	 Provide access doors as required where equipment, piping, valves, ductwork, etc. are not otherwise accessible. Access doors shall match the wall or ceiling finish and fire rating as indicated on the Architectural drawings. 16-gage steel frame and 14-gage steel door with paintable finish, except in ceramic tile, where door shall be 16-gage stainless steel with satin finish. Continuous hinge. Key and cylinder lock (except quick-opening type for Emergency Gas Shutoff Valve). Deliver doors to the General Contractor for installation. Milcor. Unless otherwise noted, the minimum sizes shall be as follows:

1 valve up to 1-1/2" 1 valve up to 3"

12" x 12" 16" x 16"

1.18	HOUSEKEEPING PAD:

A.	 Housekeeping pads shall be 6" high concrete, 3000 PSI strength, unless otherwise noted. Pad shall extend 6" beyond the largest dimensions of the equipment, unless otherwise noted. The top edge of the pad shall have a 3/4" chamfer. The pad shall have #4 reinforcing bars at 12" on center, each way, located at the mid-depth of the pad. If notpouredat thesametimeasthefloor slabwithpadrebar tiedtofloor rebar, the pad shall be anchored as follows: Drill 1" diameter, 4" deep hole in floor. Fill hole with "Por-Rok", then insert 8" long, #4 rebar into hole. Provide a minimum of 4 of these anchors per pad, but no more than 4 feet apart in either direction. Anchor points shall be 12" from the edge of the pad.

1.19	CONCRETE ANCHORS:

A.	 Steel bolt with expansion anchor requiring a drilled hole - powder driven anchors, adhesive anchors and concrete screws are not acceptable. Re-use of screw anchor holes shall not be permitted. Minimum concrete embedment shall be 4-1/2 diameters. Minimum spacing shall be 12 diameterscenter tocenter and 6diameters center to edge of concrete. Post-installed anchors in concrete used for component anchorage shall be pre-qualified for seismic application in accordance with ACI 355.2 and ICC-ES AC193. Post-installed anchors in masonry used for component

2023-06	GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING	22 05 00 - 1 of 15

anchorage shall be pre-qualified for seismic applications in accordance with ICC-ES AC01. Maximum allowable loads for tension and shear shall be as determined by Calculation in compliance with ACI 318-14, Chapter 17, and the anchor’s ICC or IAPMO evaluation report. Hilti, Powers, Red Head.

1.20	EQUIPMENT ANCHORING:

A.	All equipment shall be securely anchored in accordance with ASCE 07-16, Chapter 13, as amended byCBC Section 1617A.1. All equipment mountedon concrete shall be secured with a concrete anchor as specified above at each mounting point.

1.21	SEISMIC SUPPORT AND RESTRAINT DESIGN SERVICE:

A.	All mechanical systems (equipment, ductwork, piping, etc.) shall be provided with supports and seismic restraints in accordance with the "Seismic Restraint Components for Suspended Utilities", 2020 Edition, as published by Mason West Inc., OPM-0043-13, or other HCAI pre-approved system, and in accordance with ASCE 07-16, Chapter 13, as amended by CBC Section 1617A.1. Brace spacing shall be reduced by 50% for cast iron, plastic, no-hub, or other non-ductile piping. A copy of this manual shall be kept on site at all times during construction.

B.	 Contractor shall obtain the services of a Seismic Design service to provide engineered seismic supports and restraints for theproject. Mason Industries, or pre-approved equal. Note: Use of the “12 inch rule” does not exempt Contractor from this requirement.
1.	 All seismic designs, including designs using HCAI pre-approvals, shall be submitted as project specific engineered designs sealed and signed by a licensed California structural engineer. All seismic designs shall include project / application specific seismic design demand calculations. Said seismic design demand calculations shall account for seismic forces in all applicable direction including axial, lateral, vertical tension, vertical compression, etc. Designs shall account for prying, eccentricity, uneven loading, weak axis bending, etc.
2.	 Seismic restraint layouts for piping, ductwork and electrical raceways shall be furnished on shop drawings or added to the contractor’s shop drawings and shall include:
a.	The number, size and location of seismic braces.
b.	 Maximum support loads and seismic loads at the seismic brace locations.
c.	 Reference to specific details or pages from the HCAI pre-approved system (OPM).
d.	If use of the “12 inch rule” is intended by Contractor, design service shall verify locations where it is intended to be used is feasible and specifically identify these locations on the shop drawings, along with appropriate hanger details.
3.	 Installationsnot addressedbytheOPM approvalmust bedesigned, detailed and submitted along with the shop drawings.
4	 Submit seismic restraint layout drawings and special details for approval of the project structural engineer per the requirements listed in the HCAI pre-approval (OPM).

2023-06	GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING	22 05 00 - 1 of 15

5.	 Seismic restraint layout drawings shall bear the stamp and signature of the registered professional structural engineer licensed in the state of California who designed the layout of the braces.

1.22	ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS:

A.	 No materials or material coatings containing asbestos shall be allowed on this project.

1.23	SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION:

A.	Above Grade Piping: Provide markers on piping which is either exposed or concealed inaccessiblespaces. For pipingsystems, other thandrainandvent lines, indicate the fluid conveyed or its abbreviation, either by pre-printed markers or stenciled marking, and include arrows to show direction of flow. Pre-printed markers shall be the type that wrap completely around the pipe, requiring no other means of fastening such as tape, adhesive, etc. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors. Locate markers at ends of lines, near major branches and other interruptions including equipment in the line, where lines pass through floors, walls or ceilings or otherwise passintoinaccessiblespaces,andat50'maximumintervalsalongexposedportions of lines. Marking of short branches and repetitive branches for equipment connections is not required.

B.	 Below Grade Piping: Bury a continuous, pre-printed, bright-colored, metallic ribbon marker capable of being located with a metal detector with each underground pipe. Locate directly over buried pipe, 6" to 8" below finished grade.

C.	 Equipment: All equipment shall be identified with a plastic laminated, engraved nameplate which bears the unit mark number as indicated on the drawings (e.g. AC-4) and identifies the area or space served by the equipment. Provide 1/2" high lettering - white on black background. Nameplates shall be permanently secured to the exterior of the unit.

1.24	CLEANING:

A.	 Progressively and at completion of the job, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all of his work, removing all debris, stain and marks resulting from his work. This includes but is not limited to building surfaces, piping, equipment and ductwork, inside and out. Surfaces shall be free of dirt, grease, labels, tags, tape, rust, and all foreign material.

B.	At the end of each work day, the Contractor shall cover all open ends of piping and ductwork with protective plastic.

1.25	ACCEPTANCE TESTING:

A.	All acceptance testing as required by California Code of Regulations, Title 24, and as noted on the Certificate of Compliance form, (where applicable), shall be performed and documented by an Acceptance Test Technician (ATT). These documents must be provided to the building inspector during construction and must be completed through an Acceptance Test Technician Certification Provider

2023-06	GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING	22 05 00 - 1 of 15

(ATTCP). The Contractor shall submit a copy of the documentation to the Engineer for review (hardcopy or electronic), prior to submitting to Administrative Authority.

1.26	OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS:

A.	 Printed: Three copies of Operation and Maintenance Instructions and Wiring Diagrams for all equipment and parts list for all faucets, trim, valves, etc. shall be submitted totheEngineer. All instructions shall be clearly identified by marking them with the same designation as the equipment item to which they apply (e.g. AC-3). AllWiringDiagramsshallagreewithreviewedShopDrawingsandindicatetheexact field installation. All instructions shall be submitted at the same time and shall be bound in a suitable binder with tabs dividing each type of equipment (e.g. Pumps, Fans, Motors, etc.). Each binder shall be labeled indicating "Operating and Maintenance Instructions, Project Title, Contractor, Date" and shall have a Table of Contents listing all items included. Electronic O & M’s shall comply with the Electronic submittal requirements in this Section.

B.	 Verbal: The Contractor shall verbally instruct the Owner's maintenance staff in the operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems. The controls contractor shall present that portion of the instructions that apply to the control system. The Engineer's office shall be notified 48 hours prior to this meeting.

1.27	RECORD DRAWINGS:

A.	 The Contractor shall obtain one set of blue line prints for the project, upon which a record of all construction changes shall be made. As the work progresses, the Contractor shall maintain a record of all deviations in the work from that indicated on the drawings. Final location of all underground work shall be recorded by depth from finished grade and by offset distance from permanent surface structures, i.e. building, curbs, walks. In addition, the water, gas, sewer, underfloor duct, etc. within the building shall be recorded by offset distances from building walls. As part of the Contractor’s overhead expense, request a full set of reproducible drawings to transfer the changes, notations, etc. from the marked-up prints to the reproducible drawings. The record drawings (marked-up prints and reproducibles) shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.

PART 2: - PRODUCTS (not used)

PART 3: - EXECUTION (not used)

END OF SECTION

2023-06	GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING	22 05 00 - 1 of 15

SECTION 26 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	All work under Divisions 26, 27, and 28 is subject to the General, Supplementary, Special Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections preceding this section. The Contractor will be responsible for and governed by all requirements. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of the electrical layout and work included. The Contractor will follow these drawings to lay out and check the drawings of other trades to verify locations and spaces in which work will be installed.

1.02	SUMMARY OF WORK

A.	 This portion of the work includes furnishing of all labor and materials necessary for a complete wiring system to outlets and all equipment shown on the Drawings or covered by this section of the Specifications. In general, the work includes the following:

1.	 Power service and distribution system as shown, complete with panelboards and feeders.

2.	 Complete system of branch circuit wiring and equipment including all wiring devices and plates on all outlets.

3.	A new lighting fixture system complete with lighting controls, as shown on Plans, including factory commissioning and acceptance testing.

4.	 Data, VoIP, Security, Access, and Fire alarm system, conductors, cabling, outlets, and equipment, for complete working systems.

5.	 Raceways, wiring, fused disconnect switches, etc., for equipment covered by other sections of these Specifications.

6.	All hangers, anchors, sleeves, chases, and supports for fixtures, electrical equipment and materials including earthquake bracing.

7.	All disconnection and removal of any existing electrical facilities not to be reused or noted to be demolished.

B.	 The electrical drawings are diagrammatic and do not necessarily show all raceway, wiring, number or types of fittings, offsets, bends or exact locations of items required by the electrical systems. Items not shown or indicated which are clearly necessary for proper operation, payment or installation of systems shown shall be provided at no-increase in contract price.

C.	 The exact routing of systems and location of devices and equipment shall be governed by coordination with other trades, structural and architectural conditions. The Architect or Electrical Engineer reserves the right, at no increase in contract price, to make

2023-06	COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL	26 05 00 - 1 of 18

reasonable changes in location of electrical equipment or wiring systems; so as to coordinate with other systems, group them into orderly relationships, or to increase their utility. Contractor shall verify requirements in this regard prior to roughing in.

D.	 Install electrical work in cooperation with other trades and make proper provisions to avoid interferences and coordinate with structural and architectural features, in a manner approved by the Architect or Electrical Engineer. All changes caused by neglect to make such provisions shall be at Contractor's expense. Provide offsets and special fittings, as required to facilitate installation of the work.

E.	 When a particular product or type of product is specified with a manufacturer's designation, the latest published specifications, installation, and construction information of the manufacturer shall constitute the minimum acceptable standard. Any substitutions shall be made in accordance with the SUBSTITUTIONS sections of the Specifications.

1.04	RULES AND REGULATIONS

A.	All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest rules and regulations of the following:

1.	California Electrical Code (CEC), 2022 Edition

2.	California Energy Commission, Title 24, 2022 Standards

3.	California Fire Code, 2022 Editions

4.	National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code NFPA 72, 2022 Edition

5.	California Building, Mechanical and Plumbing Codes, 2022 Editions

6.	California Code of Regulations

a.	Title 8, Safety Orders

b.	Title 19, Fire and Panic Safety Standard

c.	Title 24, Part 1, Administrative Regulations

7.	Occupational Health and Safety Act (OSHA)

8.	California State Fire Marshal Rules

B.	Where two or more codes conflict, the most restrictive shall apply.

C.	 Nothing in these Plans and Specifications is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes.

D.	 Before the Final Certificate of Payment will be issued, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner all Certificates, Permits, Record Drawings and Instructions/Parts Manuals.

2023-06	COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL	26 05 00 - 2 of 18

1.05	TESTS AND STANDARDS

A.	 The tests, standards, or recommended procedures of the following agencies shall relate to all parts of these Specifications and shall be considered a minimum:

1.	American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

2.	Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

3.	National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

4.	Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL).

5.	National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

6.	Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA).

7.	Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).

8.	Illumination Engineering Society (IES).

1.06	EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND SITE

A.	 Before submitting a proposal, each bidder shall carefully examine the electrical, mechanical, architectural, and structural drawings and specifications. He shall also visit the site and fully inform himself as to all existing conditions and limitations applying to the work. If, after such examination and study, it appears that any change from the drawings and specifications should be allowed, the bidder shall so state in writing together with any change in cost involved.

B.	 By the act of submitting a proposal, each bidder shall be deemed to have made such examinations of the drawings and specifications and premises, and it will be assumed that he is therefore familiar with the entire scope of the project and has based his proposal upon the work described in the Drawings and Specifications and upon all existing conditions and limitations applying to his work.

1.07	IMPLEMENTATION

A.	 Workmanship: The work shall be performed by competent workmen, skilled in the particular phase of the work entailed. The work shall be first class throughout, neat, accurate and in full accordance with the intent of these Specifications and the satisfaction of the Architect or Electrical Engineer.

B.	 Safety: All standard safety procedures as set forth by OSHA, CCR, and California Division of Industrial Safety shall be strictly adhered to.

C.	 Coordination: The Contractor shall familiarize himself with the work of other crafts so as to be able to provide electrical service of correct size and voltage and other requirements to any equipment to be installed.

D.      Scheduling: The installations shall be coordinated as to location and time, and interference causing delays and non-acceptable construction shall be avoided. Order

2023-06	COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL	26 05 00 - 3 of 18

equipment in a timely manner to prevent any delays in the construction schedule and he shall bear any penalty by vendors to meet schedules.

E.	 Collaboration: Prior to commencing construction the Electrical Contractor shall arrange a conference with the general and sub-contractors as well as equipment suppliers and shall verify types, sizes, locations, requirements, controls, and diagrams of all equipment furnished by them.

F.	 Materials: All equipment and materials shall be new, UL (Underwriters Laboratories) approved, and of the best quality. When specific trade names are used in connection with materials they are mentioned as standards but, this implies no right upon the part of the Contractor to substitute other materials or methods without prior approval.

G.	 Excavation: The Contractor shall provide all excavating and backfill required for the proper installation of electrical work, whether or not shown on the Drawings or as specified. This shall be done per the EXCAVATION portion of the Specifications.

H.	 Cutting and Repairing: The Electrical Contractor shall do all cutting necessary for the proper installation of his work, repair any damage done by himself or his workmen, and coordinate his work with that of others. Do no cutting or patching without approval of the Architect or Electrical Engineer. Round holes through concrete slabs or walls shall be core drilled with a diamond drill, rectangular openings shall be cut with a diamond saw. In no case shall any concrete beam or column be cut.

I.	 Sleeves and Openings: Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all sleeves and openings through walls and floors required by electrical work. All openings around conduits in sleeves shall be sealed with a material of equal fire rating as the surface penetrated. Openings not utilized shall be temporarily sealed in a similar manner. All required sleeves shall be furnished to and coordinated with the General Contractor.

J.	 Cleaning and Painting: All exposed work shall be thoroughly cleaned upon completion of work. All panelboards and equipment not located in electrical or mechanical rooms or closets shall be field painted per painting specifications, color as selected by Architect. Panelboard enclosures, fixtures, and equipment, where finish has been marred in shipment or installation, shall be completely refinished. Minor finish damage shall be rectified as indicated by the Architect or Electrical Engineer. Contractor shall remove all waste and rubbish resulting from his work from the site.

K.	 Earthquake Restraint: All electrical equipment shall have a means to prohibit excessive motion during an earthquake. Equipment that vibrates during normal operation shall have isolators with mechanical stops. All transformers are considered to vibrate during operation.

L.	Mechanical Equipment and Other Special Equipment:

1.	 Prior to commencing construction, the Contractor shall arrange a conference with the Mechanical and Plumbing Contractors, and the Equipment Suppliers, to verify type, sizes, locations, requirements, controls and diagrams of all equipment furnished by them. In writing, he shall inform the Electrical Engineer that all phases of coordination of this equipment have been covered. If any

2023-06	COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL	26 05 00 - 4 of 18

unusual conditions or problems arise, they are to be enumerated them at this time.

2.	 The Contractor shall furnish all electrical line voltage wiring, fused disconnects and conduits, unless otherwise shown.

3.	 The Contractor shall be responsible for electrical hook-up and connection to all electrical equipment furnished by all Contractors of this Project. This includes all mechanical equipment, plumbing equipment, and special equipment furnished by other contractors.

M.	 Portable and Detachable Parts: The Contractor shall retain in his possession and shall be responsible for all portable and detachable parts or portions of the installation such as fuses, keys, locks, adapters, locking clips, and inserts until final completion of his work. These parts shall be itemized and delivered to the Owner at Project Closeout.

1.08	1.08 QUALITY CONTROL

A.	 Supervision: The Contractor shall personally, or through a competent representative, constantly supervise the work from beginning to completion and final acceptance. He shall cooperate fully with the inspection authorities in the provision of information and access to the work. He shall, to the best of his ability, maintain the same job foreman throughout the life of the project unless a replacement is requested or authorized by the Architect or Electrical Engineer.

B.	 Inspection and Tests: The Contractor shall furnish all labor and test equipment required to fully test and adjust the equipment installed under this specification and demonstrate its proper operation.

1.	 Arrange for all tests and inspections and provide minimum 48 hours’ notice to the Architect or Electrical Engineer.

2.	A test must demonstrate that each piece of equipment, outlet, fixture, device, and appurtenance is in sound operating condition and in proper cooperative relation to associated equipment.

3.	All tests shall be conducted under supervision of the Architect or Electrical Engineer, and any defects of any nature which are apparent as a result of such test shall be made correct to the satisfaction of the Architect or Electrical Engineer before final acceptance is made.

4.	 No equipment shall be tested, or operated for any other purpose, such as checking motor rotation, until it has been fully checked in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

C.	 Warranty: The Contractor agrees to replace or repair, to the satisfaction of the Owner, any part of the installation which may fail due to defective material and/or workmanship or failure to follow Drawings and Specifications, for a period of one year after final acceptance. Any damage to other work resulting from such failure or the correction thereof shall be remedied at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall, further, secure from the manufacturers of special equipment, such as signal systems, their

2023-06	COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL	26 05 00 - 5 of 18

respective guarantees and deliver same to Owner. Guarantees between Contractor and his suppliers shall not affect warranties between Contractor and Owner.

1.09	SUBMITTAL

A.	 Make submittal for all material to be used on the project, whether as specified or substitutions, within thirty-five (35) days after award of Contract by the Owner, in accordance with Section 01-300, SUBMITTAL, and the following:

1.	All submittals shall be neat and bound in a suitable folder or binder.

2.	 Identify each item by manufacturer, brand, trade, name, number, size, rating, and whatever other data is necessary to properly identify and check materials and equipment. Words "as specified" are not sufficient identification.

3.	 Identify each submittal item by reference to specifications section paragraph in which item is specified, or Drawings and Detail Number.

4.	All submittals shall be submitted in coherent groups; e.g. all light fixtures at one time. No partial, or incomplete submittal will be accepted.

5.	 Organize submittal in same sequence as they appear in specification sections, articles, or paragraphs.

B.	Product Data: Submit eight copies, in groups, as follows:

1.	Boxes, pullboxes, conduits, and raceway types required, including fittings

2.	Electric Wire, cable, and connectors

3.	Panelboards and disconnects.

4.	Lighting fixtures

5.	Wiring Devices

6.	Fire Alarm System

7.	Data, VoIP, and Low Voltage Special Systems

C.	 Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall show physical arrangement, wiring diagram, construction details, finishes, materials used in fabrication, provisions for conduit entrance, access requirements for installation and maintenance, physical size, electrical characteristics, foundation and support details, weight, power sources, circuit numbers, and shall be compatible with the Contract Drawings and Specifications.

D.	 Show wiring as actually installed, connected, and identified for this specific project. Include identification of cables and cable conductors.

E.	 Shop and instruction drawings shall cover the equipment or device to be installed and not merely the general class of such equipment or device.

2023-06	COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL	26 05 00 - 6 of 18

1.10	SUBSTITUTIONS

A.	 The Specifications or Drawings are in no way to be construed as being proprietary toward one product. Those products, or types of products, listed are intended to set the standard for quality, design, and installation procedure. However, no right is implied upon the part of the Contractor to substitute other materials, products or systems without the written approval of the Architect or Engineer.

B.	All requests for substitution shall be made in accordance with the SUBSTITUTIONS section of the Specifications.

C.	All requests for substitutions shall be in writing, received at least 14 days prior to bid date, and shall indicate all information required thereon including differences from the specified item. The request for substitution shall be accompanied by cuts, product literature, performance data, specifications, drawings, samples or other means as may be required for proper evaluation by the Architect or Electrical Engineer.

D.	All proposed substitutions shall be standard product of the firm under current manufacture and be a catalog item at time of bid.

E.	Acceptance of substitution shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be responsible for changes in other parts of the work occasioned by his substitutions and shall bear their expense.

F.       Representative samples may be required for determination of equality. It is understood that the samples may be subjected to destructive testing and will not be returned.

1.11	GUARANTEE

A.	 This Contractor agrees to replace or repair to the satisfaction of the Owner, any part of the installation that may fail due to defective material and/or workman¬ship, or failure to follow Plans and Specifications for one year after final acceptance. He shall further obtain from the manufacturers of special equipment (i.e., control systems) their respective guarantees and service manuals and deliver to Owner.

1.12	1.13 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A.	 The Engineer's decision will be final on interpretation of the Drawings and Specifications. Whenever "AS MAY BE DIRECTED", "SUITABLE", "APPROVED EQUAL", “AS REQUIRED”, or other words of similar intent and meaning are used which infer that judgment is to be exercised, it is understood that it is the judgment of the Engineer being referred to.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01	RACEWAYS:

A.	 Except where specifically shown otherwise in this section, the Contractor shall furnish and install a complete steel, rigid thread galvanized rigid steel conduit system for all wiring, including control and signal wiring.

2023-06	COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL	26 05 00 - 7 of 18

B.	Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS)

1.	All conduits shall be rigid threaded hot dipped galvanized type.

2.	 Joints are to be sealed with conductive pipe compound T&B "Kopr-Shield" before making up.

3.	 Conduits installed below grade shall be wrapped with 3M "Scotchrap #51" corrosion protection tape using half-laps for double thickness. Conduit surfaces are to be clean and dry before wrapping.

C.	Steel Electrical Metal Tubing (EMT)

1.	 EMT may be used within the hollow dry spaces of buildings, minimum 96” above the finished floor. Trade sizes 4" and smaller may be used within hollow dry spaces of the building.

2.	EMT conduit shall be Allied True Color E-Z Pull, or equal.

3.	All raceway fittings, locknuts, couplings, elbows, etc., shall be hot dipped galvanized steel finish with plastic throats or bushings. Cast-type fittings shall not be used.

D.	Non-Metallic Polyvinylchloride Conduit (PVC):

1.       Rigid nonmetallic PVC, UL labeled, and fittings approved for the purpose may be used for electrical systems 0-600V-to-ground under the following conditions:

a.	All conduits in earth under buildings or protected by permanent paving may be Schedule 40 PVC. Any conduits running through planters or unprotected are to be encased in 3" of concrete. All raceways above grade are to be steel.

b.	 Risers shall be blue color, factory PVC coated T&B "Ocal" steel ells. Bends less than 45 degrees and offsets may be field bent.

2.	All nonmetallic runs shall have a bond wire for the interconnecting of all conducting portions per Article 250 of the California Electric Code.

3.	PVC shall never be used above grade.

E.	Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC):

1.	 LMFC may be used in lengths not greater than 36" at motors and other machinery to prevent the transmission of vibration. LFMC shall be supported at both ends.

F.	 Surface raceways and fastenings are to be two-piece steel type, complete with all fittings of the same manufacturer and factory finished in gray. Surface plug-in strips shall be two circuit type with NEMA grounded receptacles every 12" with wiring space provided.

2023-06	COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL	26 05 00 - 8 of 18

G.	The minimum size conduit for lighting, power, and signal wiring shall be 3/4" trade size.

H.	 Conduits installed underground shall have a minimum coverage of 24" below a finished grade. Provide a magnetically traceable warning tape at 12" below grade. Electrical systems rated greater than 150V to Ground shall have a 3" concrete envelope.

I.	MC Cable for branch circuits with EMT Home Runs.

2.02	2.02 CONDUCTORS:

A.	All conductors shall arrive to the project in their original, unbroken packages plainly marked as follows:

1.	 Packaging shall indicate underwriter’s labels, size, conductor material, insulation of wire, names of the manufacturer and the trade name of the wire.

2.	 Wire or cable shall have factory markings every 24". Markings shall show its maximum allowable voltage, wire size and insulation.

B.	All conductors shall be a minimum of 98% conductivity, soft drawn copper, minimum #12 AWG unless shown otherwise. Conductors sized #8 and larger shall be stranded. Conductors sized #10 and smaller shall be solid type, except wiring within fixtures. Insulation shall be 600 Volt, type "THWN-2.”

C.	 Control circuits for mechanical equipment in locations subject to abnormal temperatures on or under furnaces and heaters shall be Type "RHH" 600 Volt insulation conductors.

D.	All branch circuits, fixture wiring joints, splices, and taps for conductors #10 and smaller to be made with "Scotchlok" connectors.

E.	 Two-bolt type solderless connectors or T&B "ColorKeyed" compression lugs shall be used on #8 and larger conductors.

F.	 Soft drawn compact Aluminum feeder conductors may be used for phase conductors sizes # 1/0 and above and grounding conductors # 6 and above. Provide compression lugs with oxidation inhibitor for all aluminum termination.

2.03	2.03 WIRING DEVICES:

A.	 Furnish and install wiring devices and plates as shown on the Drawings and described in these Specifications. Where more than one wiring device is mounted in the same location, such devices shall be mounted in a multi-gang plate. Wiring devices shall be specification grade or better.

B.	Wiring devices shall be of the color selected by the Architect.

C.	 Convenience outlets to consist of a specification grade duplex receptacle mounted in an outlet box in the wall, flush with the finished plaster or surface. Outlet rating to be 20 AMPS, 125 Volts, 3-wire, back and side wired.

2023-06	COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL	26 05 00 - 9 of 18

D.	All outlets shown outdoors or in damp locations shall be GFI type, installed in a weatherproof box and cover equipped with rubber gaskets. Surface outlets shall be weatherproof type FS boxes with hubs as required and equipped with rubber gaskets and weatherproof covers.

E.	 Local switches shall be quiet toggle type, totally enclosed, 20 AMPS, 277 Volts AC rated.

F.	 Device plates shall be provided for all devices with the number of gangs and openings necessary. They shall be satin brushed 302 stainless steel, unless specified otherwise.

G.	 Switch plates for all outlets not in sight of a switch shall be labeled with filled etched letters showing locations of the outlet controlled.

H.	Pilot lights shall be the type with an indicating neon or LED lamp in a handle.

2.04	OUTLET BOXES:

A.	 Outlet boxes for concealed work shall be one-piece, pressed steel, knock-out type with zinc or cadmium coating. Boxes shall not be smaller than 4" square nominal size unless otherwise indicated. Provide extension rings, extenders, plaster rings and covers necessary for flush finish. No back-to-back or through-boxes shall be used.

B.	 Bar hangers shall be used to support outlet boxes in stud or furred partitions and ceilings. Attachment screws, devices, etc., shall be of the proper type to secure boxes to metal studs. Use expansion shields in concrete and masonry. Where used for lighting fixtures, outlet boxes shall be equipped with fixture studs.

C.	Provide approved knock-out seals on all unused open knock-out holes.

D.	 Outlet boxes installed in concrete slabs shall be two-piece concrete boxes, not less than 4" nominal size with a minimum depth of 2 ½".

E.	 Surface boxes of cast metal threaded hub-type with suitable gasketed covers shall be used for exposed conduit runs less than 5' above finished floor, or where waterproof boxes are required.

2.05	2.05 PULL BOXES AND WIREWAYS:

A.	 Pull and junction boxes shall be installed as shown to ease the pulling of wire and to comply with CEC requirements.

B.	 Wireways shall be constructed in accordance with UL 870 for wireways, auxiliary gutters and associated fittings. Every component, including lengths, connectors, and fittings, shall be UL listed.

2.06	2.06 TERMINAL CABINETS AND CLOSETS:

A.	 Cabinets and fronts shall be in accordance with NEMA Standard Publication No. PB 1-1971 and UL Standard No. 67. Fronts shall include doors and have flush brushed stainless steel, cylinder tumbler-type locks with catches and spring-loaded door pulls.

2023-06	COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL	26 05 00 - 10 of 18

The flush lock shall not protrude beyond the front of the door. All locks shall be keyed like the panelboard locks. Fronts are to be adjustable indicating trim clamps that shall be completely concealed when the doors are closed.

B.	 Doors shall be mounted by completely concealed steel hinges. Fronts shall not be removable with the door in the locked position. A frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. Fronts shall be of code gauge full finish steel with rust inhibiting primer and baked enamel finish.

C.	 Install finish grade 3/4" plywood board, primed and painted light gray on both sides and the edges, at the interior rear surface of telephone and signal cabinets.

D.	 Provide solderless box lugs, terminal blocks with a white marking strip for conductors sized #16 and larger. Punch-down terminals shall be used for No. 18 and smaller and shall be used for all public address, intercom and other electrical terminations.

2.07	2.07 FLOOR BOXES:

A.	 Provide fully adjustable Type 1, Class 1 watertight 2 hour rated poke through floor pockets complete with wiring devices where shown on Plans.

B.	Fittings for floor box cover finish shall be as selected by Architect.

C.	 Verify floor finish prior to purchase. Provide carpet flanges of proper size in carpeted or tiled areas.

2.08	2.08 NOISE CONTROL:

A.	 Outlet boxes at opposite sides of partitions shall not be placed back-to-back or through-boxes employed except where specifically permitted on the Drawings by note to reduce transmission of noise between occupied spaces.

B.	 Contactors, starters, and similar noise-producing devices shall not be placed on walls that are common to occupied spaces unless specifically called for on the Drawings. Where such devices must be mounted on walls common to occupied spaces, they shall be shock mounted or isolated in such a manner to effectively prevent the transmission of their inherent noise to the occupied space.

C.	 Contactors, starters, drivers, and like equipment found noticeably noisier than other similar equipment on the project will be deemed defective and shall be replaced at Engineer's request.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01	INSTALLATION - GENERAL:

A.	 The layout and installation of electrical work shall be coordinated with the overall construction schedule to prevent delay in completion of the project. Checking these Drawings before organizing the electrical work schedule or installing material and equipment shall be obligatory.

2023-06	COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL	26 05 00 - 11 of 18

B.	 Dimensions and information regarding accurate locations of equipment and structural limitations and finish shall be verified with other sections.

C.	 The Drawings do not show all the offsets, bends, special fittings, junction boxes, or pull boxes necessary to meet job conditions and the CEC. They shall be provided as required.

D.	 Electrical equipment, outlets, junction and pull boxes shall be installed in accessible locations avoiding obstructions, preserving headroom, and keeping openings and passageways clear.

E.	 Minor adjustments in the locations of equipment shall be made where necessary, providing such adjustments do not adversely affect function of the equipment. Major adjustments for the location of equipment shall be approved by the Architect and detailed on the Record Drawings.

F.	 Structural Fittings: Furnish and install the necessary sleeved, inserts, hangers, anchor bolts and related structural items. Install at the proper time.

G.	 Openings have been shown on the Architectural and Structural Drawings. Should any additional openings or holes be required for the work of this section, the cost shall be the obligation of this section.

H.	Contractors shall inspect and account for existing conditions affecting his work.

I.	 Sleeves for electrical conduits passing through walls or slabs shall be placed under the work of this section before concrete is poured. Where conduits pass through suspended floor slabs, sleeves shall be standard weight galvanized steel pipe extending 2" above the finished floor level.

J.	 Sleeves at other locations shall be either light weight galvanized steel pipe or galvanized sheet steel. Clearance between conduits and sleeves shall not be less than ½".

K.	 Sleeves through outside walls and below grade shall be caulked tight with oakum and the ends sealed with an approved semi-plastic coal tar base compound or shall be of the stuffing box type. Other sleeves shall be packed with glass wood ends sealed with Duxseal and covered with chrome plated escutcheon plates.

L.	 Conduits entering through floor slabs at grade level will not require sleeves and shall be placed with tops of couplings flush at floor level.

M.	 Sleeves for electrical conduit passing outside walls below grade shall be the through-wall and floor seal type.

3.02	3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS AND RACEWAYS:

A.	 Raceways for electrical or signal systems run in earth that are not protected by permanent paving shall be encased in concrete with the encasement extending under the building. Branch circuit and signal system conduits installed underground between outlets, terminals, and panels within the building shall be liquid and gas tight.

2023-06	COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL	26 05 00 - 12 of 18

B.	 Conduits shall be concealed unless otherwise shown. All conduit runs exposed to view, except those in attic spaces, shall be installed parallel or at right angles to structural members, walls, or lines of the building.

C.	All conduit runs shall be mechanically and electrically continuous from outlet to outlet. Conduit size or type shall not be changed between outlets.

D.	 No conduits shall be run on the roof unless specifically shown on the roof. They shall be full weight rigid steel on PVC sleepers. Install roof jacks at penetrations.

E.	 Conduit stubs installed for future extensions shall be rigid steel for at least 5' of a conduit run. The conduit ends shall be terminated with couplings and pipe plugs. The closed end shall be double wrapped with Scotchrap #50 for the last 12". The concrete envelope shall leave 3" of the wrapped conduit exposed for future connection.

F.	 Conduit for equipment connected permanently to the floor shall be installed with a 6" rigid conduit nipple to a flush coupling to ensure a watertight connection at the floor.

G.	All conduits shall be sloping to drain and shall be sealed with JM Clipper "Duxseal" on the high end.

H.	All conduit bends shall be carefully made so that the conduit is not flattened, kinked, or otherwise compromised. The inner radius of any conduit bend shall be not less than eight times the inside diameter. Where conduits are run exposed in groups, bends of all conduits shall have a common center. Use of standard elbows will not be allowed at these locations.

I.	 Each run of a conduit shall be finished before concrete, plaster, etc., is installed to ensure against obstruction or omissions. After installation, the ends of all conduits shall be plugged with metal pennies. All conduit systems shall be completed and thoroughly cleaned and dried inside before installation of any conductors.

J.	 Conduits shall enter at right angles and be connected to all outlet boxes, pull boxes, and cabinets with locknuts and plastic throated grounding bushings, providing a continuous grounding system in accordance with CEC Article 250.

K.	 Use Erikson couplings where a union is necessary. Running threads will not be permitted.

L.	 Pull 1/8" stranded nylon pull ropes with 18" coiled at each end in all empty conduits with identification tags indicating source and destination.

M.	Furnish and install seal-offs in all conduit runs through areas of different temperature.

N.	All concealed conduits shall be installed in as direct a line as possible between outlets. No more than four (4) quarter bends or their equivalent will be allowed between outlets. Feeder conduits shall follow arrangement shown on Plans unless a change is authorized. In general, branch circuit conduits shall follow the arrangement as shown insofar as structural conditions permit.

2023-06	COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL	26 05 00 - 13 of 18

O.	All exposed runs shall parallel buildings, walls, or partitions, and shall be supported on Kindorf Hangers to meet Title 24 Part 6, California Code of Regulations.

P.	All telephone, data, and other signal conduits shall be installed with long radius sweeps. No factory ells will be permitted.

Q.	 Chrome escutcheon plates are to be used on all conduit penetrating walls, floors or ceilings.

R.	 Expansion joints shall be provided at building structural expansions or as required due to length of run or difference in temperatures.

S.       All fittings exposed or in damp areas shall have sealing glands and proper gaskets. Fittings in hazardous areas shall be of the type approved for the particular hazard.

T.	 Provide two 1" conduit stubs out of all panels and terminal cabinets to above a hung ceiling or as otherwise shown.

U.	Roof Penetrations:

1.	 Where raceways penetrate roofing or any similar structural area, provide iron roof jacks sized to fit tightly to a raceway for a weather-tight seal with the flange extending a minimum of 9" under roofing on all sides. Completely seal the opening between the inside diameters of the roof flashing and the outside diameters of the penetrating raceways. Coordinate all work with the roofing section of Specifications.

V.	Fire Penetration Seals:

1.	 Seal all penetrations for work of this section through fire rated floors, walls and ceilings to prevent the spread of smoke, fire, toxic gas or water through the penetration before, during or after a fire. The fire rating of the penetration seal shall be at least that of which it is installed so that the original fire rating is maintained as required by CEC Article 300.21.

2.	 Where applicable, provide OZ Type CFSF/1 and CAFSF/1 fire seal fittings for conduit and cable penetrations through concrete and masonry walls, floors, slabs and similar structures. Apply an approved firestopping system, including wall wrap, partitions, caps and other accessories as required. All manufacturers' instructions and recommendations for installation of sealing fittings and barrier sealing systems.

3.03	CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTIONS:

A.	General Requirements:

1.	All branch circuit and fixture wiring joints, splices and taps for conductors #10 and smaller shall be made with UL approved connectors listed for 600 Volts. Connector bodies shall consist of a cone shape rotating expandable coil spring inserts insulated with phenolic or plastic shell.

2023-06	COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL	26 05 00 - 14 of 18

2.	 Do not install wire in conduits until all work of any nature that may cause injury (including pouring of concrete) is completed. Use care in pulling in wires to prevent damage to wire or insulation. Do not use blocks, tackle or other mechanical means to pull #8 AWG or smaller conductors.

3.	 Splices are not permitted except in outlet boxes, pull boxes, junction boxes, panelboard gutters and auxiliary gutters. No splices shall be made in underground boxes.

4.	 Use only wire pulling compounds listed by the UL as a lubricant for pulling conductors through raceways. The use of cleaning agents that have deleterious effect on conductor coverings are not permitted.

5.	 Unless otherwise shown on Plans or specified elsewhere, leave at least 12" of free conductors at each connected outlet (outlets connected to equipment or device) and 9" of free conductors and coil neatly in outlet box for future connection.

B.	Terminations:

1.	 Circuit and signal terminations to single screw or push on terminals shall be done with insulated “Sta-Kons” or approved equal terminals.

2.	 Bolt type solderless connectors shall be torqued with a torque wrench according to the manufacturer's recommendations and then retightened after 24-48 hours before taping. Owners' inspector shall be informed of this procedure during the waiting period and shall witness the act of retightening.

C.	Feeders and Branch Circuits:

1.	 Connectors and lugs for terminating stranded conductors sized #8 and larger shall be machine crimp compression type.

2.	All splices shall be taped with Scotch "Super 88" vinyl electrical tape, and "Scotch Fill" tape putty where necessary for a smooth joint. For other than normal temperatures or conditions, Scotch #27 or #2520 shall be used.

3.	 No splices shall be made below grade in a manhole or pull holes without the Engineer's written approval. When approved, these shall be encapsulated with 3M potting kits per 3M Specifications.

4.	 Wires in panels, cabinets, pullboxes and wiring gutters shall be squared, labeled, and neatly grouped with Ty-raps and fanned out to the terminals.

5.	 Support all conductors in hand holes/manholes and label with plastic rope. Tag all conductors with plastic waterproof tags.

3.04	3.04 WIRING DEVICES:

A.       Wiring devices shall be securely fastened to the outlet box. Where the outlet box covers are back from the finished walls, the device shall be built-out with washers so

2023-06	COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL	26 05 00 - 15 of 18

that it is rigidly held in place to the box. Provide metal extenders in flammable construction per CEC.

B.	All device screw slots shall be left in a vertical orientation.

3.05	3.05 OUTLET BOXES:

A.	 Boxes shall be securely fastened in position to the ceiling or walls with screws or bolts. Nails are not acceptable. The Contractor shall set and align all equipment, level, bolt down, or otherwise secure in place. No back-to-back or through-boxes shall be used.

B.	 Boxes shall be accurately located and set square and true with exposed edges of a box or plaster ring flush with finished surface of walls or ceiling. All unused boxes shall be equipped with blank covers that shall match existing covers.

C.	Boxes shall have no unused openings.

D.	 Boxes shall be cleaned of all direct plaster, etc., before conductors are installed. Rust spots shall be scraped to bare metal and painted with Rust-Oleum "Cold Galvanizing Compound".

E.	 Suspended fixture outlets shall be equipped with 3/8" fixture mounting stud bolted to wood backing or metal studs to safely support fixture weight.

F.	 Make any change in outlet location necessary to all job conditions and rearrange fixtures and equipment as directed.

G.	 Study all Plans as to relation of spaces surrounding outlets so that this work may be installed at the proper time with others. Fixtures and equipment shall be symmetrically located. Conflicts and discrepancies shall be referred to the Architect immediately and prior to box installation.

3.06	3.06 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES AND WIREWAYS:

A.	 Boxes shall be installed square and plumb. An engraved nameplate shall be installed indicating the function of each box on the exterior in unfinished areas and on the interior in finished areas. Permanent markers are not acceptable.

B.	 Pullboxes and wireways shall be concealed or installed flush in finished areas. They shall be surface mounted in machine rooms or unfinished areas.

3.07	TERMINAL CABINETS AND CLOSETS:

A.	Install, level, and identify per schedule.

3.08	FLOOR BOXES AND PEDESTALS:

A.	 Floor boxes are to be installed level and plumb. Fill with paper prior to pouring concrete. Re-level after concrete has set, then raise to accommodate the floor finish. Core drill for poke through type.

B.	The installation of pedestals shall be coordinated with cabinet work.

2023-06	COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL	26 05 00 - 16 of 18

3.09	3.09 IDENTIFICATION

A.	Conductors:

1.	All power and low voltage systems conductors and cabling shall be identified in accordance with the following schedule:

a.	120/208 Volts, 3-phase, 4-wire Wye: Red-Black-Blue, Neutral White

b.	 120/240 Volts, 3-phase, 4-wire Delta: Black-Blue for single-phase, Orange for 3-phase stinger, Neutral White

c.	480/277 Volts, 3-phase, 4-wire Wye: Yellow-Brown-Orange-, Neutral Grey

d.	Bond or grounding conductor (GWG): Green

e.	Special system conductors shall be color coded and labeled

2.	 Brady Labels shall be used to identify terminals and destination of feeders, branch circuits, signal and control circuits, etc., at all termina¬tions and junction boxes and shall be coordinated with the nameplates in all boxes and equipment.

3.	All terminals in the switchboards, panels, relays, switches, devices, starter terminals, etc., shall have Brady Labels for identification to identify both ends of all wiring. Wires #8 and smaller to be terminated on terminal strips SquareD-type 9080K with white marking strip and screw lugs for wire size.

B.	 Nameplates: The Contractor shall furnish and install 1" x 3" x 3/32" thick laminated black Nylon nameplates with a white core, unless specifically shown as red with a white core, engraved to produce white letters on black background for all items of electrical equipment including 2-pole and 3-pole circuit breakers, panelboards, starters, relays, time switches and disconnect switches. The plates shall screwed in place with stainless steel screws. Adhesive backed plates are not acceptable.

C.	 Panels: Panels having single-pole circuit breakers shall be provided with typed schedules mounted in welded metal holders behind plastic.

D.	 Devices: All devices shall have their branch circuit identified on the back side of device plate with a permanent type black marker, i.e., CKT A-21.

3.10	SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS:

A.	 Provide inserts, anchors, supports, rods, brackets and miscellaneous items to adequately support and secure the electrical systems and equipment.

B.	 Secure hangers, brackets, conduit straps, supports and electrical equipment to surfaces by means of toggle bolts on hollow masonry. Utilize expansion shields and machine screws or standard preset inserts on concrete or solid masonry. Utilize machine screws or bolts on metal surfaces. Utilize wood screws on wood construction. Wood, fiber plugs, or concrete nails are not acceptable.

2023-06	COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL	26 05 00 - 17 of 18

C.	 Power or velocity driven inserts may not be used for any anchorage unless specifically approved by the Engineer and where the use does not affect the finished appearance of work. Under no circumstance shall these be used in pre-stressed slabs, beams, purlins, or precast members in tension.

D.	 Seismic Requirements: Provide vertical and lateral supporting equipment to resist the application of seismic forces per California Code of Regulations, Title 24 Chapter 23.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL	26 05 00 - 18 of 18

SECTION 26 20 00

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01	RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A.	A.Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B.	 Section 26 05 00 - Basic Materials and Methods section and other Division 26 sections apply to work specified in this section.

1.02	SCOPE:

A.	A.Work included: Furnishing and installation of a complete electrical service, distribution, and grounding system. Conditions of this section apply to all other 26 40 00 series sections included.

B.	 Related Work: Refer to other sections, particularly those listed below, so as to properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a finished, workmanlike, fully functioning installation.

C.	All other Electrical Sections: Division 26

1.03	QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A.	See Section 26 05 00.

1.04	1.04 SUBMITTAL:

A.	 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on service entrance equipment, switchboards, motor control centers and/or individual starters, transformers, panelboards, disconnect switches and grounding components.

B.	 Trip Curves: When requested, submit trip timing curves for all circuit interrupting devices.

C.	Nameplate Schedule: Submit nameplate schedule for approval.

1.05	COMPONENT COORDINATION:

A.	 In order to maintain close control and coordinate the various components of the distribution systems, the number of manufacturers shall be kept to a minimum. Equipment manufacturer shall be General Electric or Square D. It shall be the manufacturer's responsibility through the Electrical Contractor to coordinate all components of the system in order to ensure systems that will provide maximum protection of equipment and reliable safe operation.

2023-06	LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION	26 05 00 - 1 of 8

1.06	NAMEPLATES:

A.	 Laminated phenolic plastic, color coded black for 120/208 volt equipment, with white letters. Provide for identification of each transformer, panelboard and motor control center, secure to face with two (2) chrome plated screws each. A schedule of nameplates shall be included with the shop drawings for approval.

1.07	FEEDER CONNECTIONS:

A.	 Provide cast, saddle type bolted lugs or hydraulically set compression lugs for all bus connections. Manufacturer shall be Thomas and Betts, Burndy, O.Z. or approved equal. Lugs in which the set of screw embeds directly into feeder conductor shall not be used.

1.08	MISCELLANEOUS:

A.	 Equipment Bases: Provide appropriately sized concrete housekeeping bases for all floor-mounted equipment.

B.	 B.Hoisting Lifting Lugs: Provide on all heavy equipment as required to ensure safe hoisting.

C.	 Space for Future Protective Device: Provide as indicated on drawings; shall be completely equipped for the future addition of a circuit breaker or fused switch, including all connections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01	PANELBOARDS:

A.	 Panelboards shall be Bolt-down Circuit Breaker type, with voltage, phase, and breakers as specified in panelboard schedules. Panelboards shall be installed flush or surface or specified, at locations as indicated on plans. Panelboards shall be installed in code gauge rust proof steel cabinets with flush door having flush locks all keyed alike and with trim cut square and true.

1.	 Panelboards: General Electric A-Series and Spectra Series; Square D, type I-Line, NQ, NQOB, and NF; or approved equal.

B.	All panelboards and breakers shall meet the requirements of the indicated available symmetrical short circuit current or have a minimum bus bracing to meet figure shown.

C.	All interiors shall be completely factory assembled. They shall be so designed that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors, so that circuits may be changed without machining, drilling or tapping.

D.	 Branch circuits shall be arranged using double row construction except when narrow column panels are indicated. A nameplate shall be provided listing panel type and ratings.

2023-06	LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION	26 05 00 - 2 of 8

E.	 Unless otherwise noted, full size insulated neutral bars shall be included. Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Neutral bussing shall have a suitable lug or each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. A ground bus will be included in all panels.

F.	 Boxes shall be at least 20 inches wide made from galvanized steel. Provided minimum gutter space in accordance with California Electric Code. Where feeder cables supplying the mains of a panel are carried through its box to supply other electrical equipment, the box shall be sized to include the additional required wiring space. At least four interior mounting studs with adjustable nuts shall be provided.

G.	 Door hinges shall be concealed. All locks shall be flush, stainless steel, cylinder tumbler type locks with catches and spring loaded door pulls, keyed alike and directory frame and card having a transparent cover shall be furnished with each door.

H.	All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the trim shall be properly cleaned, primed with a rust inhibiting phosphatized coating and finish with a gray ANSI 61 paint. Trims for flush panels shall overlap the box for at least 3/4 inch all around. Surface trims shall have the same width and height as the box. Trims shall be mountable by a screwdriver without the need for special tools. After installation, trim clamps shall not be accessible when the panel door is closed and locked.

I.	All main bus bars shall be cooper or tin plated aluminum sized in accordance with UL standards to limit the temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 50 degrees C above an ambient of 40 degrees C maximum.

J.	 Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip indicating, and have common trip on all multipole breakers. (Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking position between ON and OFF when the breaker is tripped). Branch circuit breakers feeding convenience outlets shall have sensitive instantaneous trip settings of not more than 10 times the trip rating of the breaker to prevent repeated arcing shorts resulting from frayed appliance cords. Single pole 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers shall be UL listed as "Switching Breakers" and carry the SWD marking. UL Class A (5 milliampere sensitivity) ground fault circuit protection shall be provided on 120V ac branch circuits as specified on the plans or panel board schedule. This protection shall be an integral part of the branch circuit breaker which also provided overload and short circuit protection for branch circuit wiring. Tripping of a branch circuit breaker containing ground fault circuit interruption shall not disturb the feeder circuit to the panelboard. A single pole breaker containing ground fault circuit interruption shall not disturb the feeder circuit to the panelboard. A single pole circuit breaker with integral ground fault circuit interruption shall require no more panelboard branch circuit space than a conventional slide pole circuit breaker. Connections to the bus shall be bolt on.

2.04	DISCONNECTS:

A.	Motor and circuit disconnects shall have an Underwriters' Laboratory label.

B.       Disconnect switches shall be suitable for area where they are installed, i.e., weatherproof, and shall be rated heavy duty. Use only 600 volt class with proper

2023-06	LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION	26 05 00 - 3 of 8

number of poles. Switches shall be fused unless indicated on plans. Fuses shall be of type specified on plans.

C.	 When a disconnect switch is not clearly visible from the control location, provide an operating handle which is lockable in the open position.

2.05	GROUNDING:

A.	Clamps, bonds, etc. suitable and as necessary to provide continuous ground system.

B.	Ground Rods: "Copperweld" 3/4" diameter, 10' long.

C.	All grounding conductors shall be copper, sizes not less than that required under CEC Table 250.122.

D.	All grounding electrode conductors shall be copper, sizes not less than that required under CEC Table 260.66.

2.06	SWITCHBOARDS:

A.	 Manufacturer's: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide switchboards of one of the following:

1.	General Electric Company

2.	Square D Company

B.	 General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide switchboards of types, sizes, characteristics, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, components, and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installation. Service entrance switchboards shall comply with serving utility requirements.

C.	AC Dead-Front Distribution Switchboards: Provide factory assembled, dead-front, metal enclosed, self-supporting secondary power switchboards, of types, sizes and electrical ratings and characteristics indicated; consisting of panel (vertical) units, and containing circuit breakers of quantities, ratings and types indicated. Provide copper or tin plated aluminum main bus and connections to switching devices of sufficient capacity to limit rated continuous operating temperature rise to 54 degrees F, and 90 degrees F for circuit breaker branches; with main bus and tap connections silver-surfaced and tightly bolted for maximum conductivity. Brace bus for short circuit stresses up to maximum interrupting capacity. Prime and paint switchboard with manufacturer's finish and color. Construct units for outdoor, NEMA Type 3R.

D.	 Enclosures: Construct dead-front switchboards, suitable for floor mounting, with front cable/wire and conduit accessibility as indicated. Provide welded steel channel framework, hinge wireway front covers to permit ready access to branch circuit breaker load slide terminals. Coat enclosures with manufacturer's standard corrosive resistant finish.

2023-06	LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION	26 05 00 - 4 of 8

E.	 Bussing: Provide switchboard with sufficient cross-sectional area to fulfill U.L. Standard 891 pertaining to temperature rise.

2.07	MOTOR STARTERS (When used):

A.	 Manual motor starters to be quick-make, quick break, with overload protection. General Electric cr 101, or Square D equivalent, for 120/240 volt 1 hp or less.

B.	 Magnetic motor starters shall be across the line unless indicated with control power transformer (120 volt coil) and with overload relay protection. Combination type shall have integral fused switch or circuit breaker as indicated.

2.08	TRANSFORMERS:

A.	 Transformers, Dry Type: Distribution transformers shall be constructed and tested in accordance with ASA and NEMA Standards, TP-1 minimum, and shall be wound with copper or aluminum conductors. Performance of transformers shall be equal to or exceed ASA and NEMA published criteria.

B.	 Transformers shall be self cooled type with Class H, NEMA, Group 111 insulation and a temperature rise of 150°C under continuous full load conditions with an ambient of 400°C.

C.	 Transformers supplying voltage to wave altering devices (computers, electronic ballasts, etc.) shall be K4 rated minimum, or as noted otherwise on plans.

D.	 Transformers shall be equipped with four 2-1/2% taps (2 taps above and 2 taps below normal voltage). Windings shall be of the fire resistant type, designed for natural convection cooling through normal air circulation.

E.	 Core mounting frames and enclosures shall be of welded and bolted construction with sufficient mechanical strength and rigidity to withstand shipping, erection and short circuit stresses.

F.	 Enclosure cover plates shall be Code gauge sheet steel, captive bolted to the enclosure framework. Enclosure shall have suitable ventilating openings with rodent proof screens. Enclosure shall be provided with lifting lugs and jacking plates as required.

G.	 Transformers shall be furnished complete with mounting channels and mounting bolts. Metal parts, except cores and core mounting frames, shall be cleaned, rust proofed and given a heavy coating of an inert primer.

H.	 Transformers used indoors shall be “low noise.” They shall be provided with vibration dampers. Size and number of shock mounts shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

I.	Transformers shall be manufactured by General Electric, Square D, or approved equal.

2023-06	LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION	26 05 00 - 5 of 8

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01	INSTALLATION OF SWITCHGEAR AND SWITCHBOARDS:

A.	 Install switchgear and switchboards as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that switchboards comply with requirements of NEMA and CEC standards, and applicable portions of NECA's "Standard of Installation".

B.	 Prior to energization of circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's torque specifications. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize switchboards and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements.

3.02	INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS:

A.	Provide mounting brackets, busbar drilling, and filler pieces for unused spaces.

B.	 Branch circuits shall be connected as shown in line diagrams and/or panelboard schedules, with wires neatly tie wrapped in panel.

C.	All distribution panelboards shall have all sub feeders and main breakers marked with 1" x 3" plastic name tags secured with two self-tapping screws.

D.	All panelboards shall be provided with a 2" x 3-1/2" plastic name tag on the front of the panel door or on the trim, indicating panel designation and distribution panel and circuit feeding above panel, secured with two self-tapping screws.

E.	 Branch circuit panelboards shall have a plastic covered circuit directory card on the inside of each door with all circuit destinations neatly typed.

F.	 Contractor shall check and tighten all factory made wire or lug connections. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torqueing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A.

G.	Install four (4) spare 3/4" conduits from all panelboards to accessible ceiling space.

3.03	INSTALLATION OF DISCONNECTS:

A.	 Install disconnects for all equipment and motors of the size required and as recommended by manufacturer.

3.04	INSTALLATION OF GROUNDING:

A.	 Scope: Provide grounding system complying with the codes and ordinances specified. Grounding system shall provide continuity through the entire electrical system.

1.	Panelboard ground buses.

2.	PVC conduit or other raceways.

2023-06	LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION	26 05 00 - 6 of 8

3.	All motors.

4.	All lighting fixtures.

5.	Grounding terminals of all receptacles.

6.	Miscellaneous grounds required by code.

B.	 Equipment and raceway bonding procedures shall be rigidly maintained and meet all jurisdictional requirements of codes and regulations.

C.	 Good, electrically continuous, metal to metal contacts shall be made wherever possible at all panel boxes, pull boxes, etc. Where it is not possible to obtain good contacts, the conduit shall be bonded round the boxes with a 6 BS gauge, rubber covered, double braided wire with ground clamps.

D.	A separate grounding conductor shall be run in all conduit runs from distribution, lighting, and power, etc. panelboards, motor control outlets, etc., back to their respective service or distribution panelboards.

E.	 Flexible Conduit Grounding: Provide a separate grounding conductor in all flexible conduit runs to include watertight flexible conduit with integral grounding straps. Install ground conductors inside conduit with ungrounded conductors. Extend from nearest panel to device being connected.

F.	 Receptacle Circuits: Provide a separate grounding conductor in all receptacle circuit conduit runs, back to serving panelboard.

3.05	INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS:

A.	 In finished areas, mount motor protection switches flush and install suitable cover plates.

B.	Install heaters correlated with full load current of motors provided.

C.	Set overload devices to suit motor provided.

3.06	INSTALLATION OF TRANSFORMERS

A.	 Transformer core frame shall be installed level on shock absorbing pads within the enclosure.

B.	 Mounting bolts on floor-mounted transformers shall be extended into pads only and shall not be in direct contact with building structural members.

C.	Flexible jumpers shall be installed for grounding continuity from enclosure to conduits.

D.	Voltage Check:

1.	 The Contractor shall set the taps on all transformers (which are a part of this contract) as necessary to provide satisfactory operating voltages with all present loads energized. A check shall be made in the presence of the District Inspector

2023-06	LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION	26 05 00 - 7 of 8

at a panel fed from each transformer and which is the farthest from the transformer. Voltages at the transformers ranging from 118 to 122 volts inclusive, for 120-volt systems and proportionately equivalent for higher voltage systems, are acceptable.

2.	 The Contractor shall provide all instruments and accessories required to perform the checks. Volt meters shall be accurate within 1% and shall have scales permitting the voltage readings to be made on the upper half of the scale.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION	26 05 00 - 8 of 8

SECTION 31 23 33
TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1	RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.	 Drawings and general provisions of Supplementary Conditions and Division Section.

the Contract, including General and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this

B.	 Geotechnical Report prepared by Krazan & Associates, Inc., Project number 012-19215, dated by January 13, 2020.

1.2	SUMMARY:

A.	SECTION INCLUDES
1.	Excavating trenches, holes and pits for constructing the Work. 2.	Backfill and compaction.
3.	Providing suitable bedding and backfill material, as specified herein.

B.	RELATED SECTIONS
1.	Contract General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements. 2.	Section 31 11 00 - Site Clearing
3.	Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork: Excavation, Filling and Grading 4.	Section 31 22 22 - Soil Materials
5.	Section 33 12 00 - Water Utilities 6.	Section 33 40 00 - Storm Drainage

1.3	REFERENCES

A.	 ANSI/ASTM D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 10 lb (4.54 Kg) Rammer and 18 inch (457 mm) Drop.

1.4	DEFINITIONS

A.	 Utility:	Any buried or above ground pipe, conduit, cable, associate devices or appurtenances, or substructure pertaining hereto.

2023-06	TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL	31 23 33 1 of 7

1.5	QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.	Qualifications

1.	Installer:

a.	 Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed three (3) projects of similar scope and size to that indicated for this project within the past 5 years.

B.	Regulatory Requirements:

1.	 In accordance with Specification Section REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS and the following:

a.	CARB

b.	CF c.	EPA
d.	CAL/OSHA

Materials and equipment used for this Project shall comply with the current applicable regulations of the California Air Resources Board [CARB] and the Environmental Protection Agency [EPA].
City of Fresno, Codes and Ordinances Environmental Protection Agency.
Comply with all provisions of the Construction Safety Orders and the General Safety Orders of the California Division of Occupational Safety and Health, as well as all other applicable regulations as they pertain to the protection of workers from the hazard of caving ground excavations.

C.	Certificates:

1.	 Installer’s certification that all trench backfill installation meets or exceeds the requirements of this specification.
2.	 Contractor’s certification (on Contractor’s letterhead paper) that the trench backfill materials and installation meets or exceeds the requirements of this specification.

D.	Meetings:

1.	Pre-Installation: Schedule prior to the start of work.

a.	Coordinate the work with other work being performed.
b.	 Identify any potential problems, which may impede planned progress and proper installation of work regarding quality of installation and warranty requirements.

2.	Progress: Scheduled by the Contractor during the performance of the work.

a.	Review for proper installation of work progress.
b.	Identify any installation problems and acceptable corrective measures.
c.	Identify any measures to maintain or regain project schedule if necessary.

2023-06	TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL	31 23 33 2 of 7

3.	Completion: Scheduled by the Contractor upon proper completion of the work.

a.	 Inspect and identify any problems which may impede issuance of warranties or guaranties.

4.	Maintain installed work until the Notice of Substantial Completion has been filed.

1.6	COORDINATION

A.	Coordinate work with Owner’s personnel.

B.	 Verify that the location of existing utilities have been indicated at work site by utility authorities.

1.7	EXISTING UTILITIES

A.	 Where subsurface work involves more than the normal depth of excavation required for the removal and/or construction of surface improvements (surface improvements such as concrete work, paving, landscaping, signs, etc.), the Engineer will have made a diligent attempt to indicate on the plans the location of all main and trunkline utility facilities which may affect the Work. In many cases, however, the only available information relative to the existing location of said facilities may have been small scale undimensioned plats. The locations of said facilities, therefore, shall be considered approximate only, until exposed by the Contractor.

B.	 Under circumstance similar to 31 23 33/1.7A, service laterals and appurtenances will have also been shown where information was available as to their location. In many cases, however, the only available information relative to the existing location of said facilities may have been small scale undimensioned plats. The locations of said facilities, therefore, shall be considered approximate only, until exposed by the Contractor.

C.	Determine exact location of existing buried utilities by:

1.	 Marking on ground or pavement surface the alignment and extent of the proposed facilities and the probable location of existing utilities using construction plans and existing surface features.
2.	 Requesting Underground Service Alert (USA) to indicate location of existing buried facilities (phone 1-800-227-2600). Provide USA a minimum of two (2) working days notice of request for locations, and notify Owner of said request concurrently.
3.	 Locate exact location of existing utilities by hand methods of excavation, or by use of vacuum equipment.

D.	At proposed work location, expose by hand methods (or vacuum equipment) all existing utilities along the route of the proposed work prior to using any mechanical equipment. If mechanical equipment is allowed at a particular location, it may only be used after the completion by the Contractor of a successful exhaustive search by hand (or vacuum equipment) methods to locate all existing facilities as indicated on the

2023-06	TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL	31 23 33 3 of 7

plans, and/or as indicated on the ground by USA or Owner’s personnel.

E.	 Provide Field Engineering per Contract General Conditions and Division 1 to record the location of all utilities encountered. Where locational conflicts exist between existing utilities and the planned location of facilities to be constructed under the Contract, submit detailed information to the Owner’s Inspector and Engineer for review and direction.

F.	 Maintain all existing utility mains and service lines in constant service during construction of the Work.

G.	 Where service disruptions are allowed, minimize the length of such disruptions by proper scheduling and diligent pursuit of the work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1	FILL MATERIALS

A.	 Fill Type S1, S2, S4 and S5, as specified in Division 31 Specification Section SOIL MATERIALS.

2.2	WARNING TAPE

A.	3” wide warning tape shall be installed over all of the pipelines as shown on the details.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1	PREPARATION

A.	Protect plant life, lawns, trees, shrubs, and other features not authorized for removal.

B.	 Protect existing structures, fences, sidewalks, curbs, and other improvements from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic.

C.	Maintain and protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain.

D.	 Comply with all provisions of the Construction Safety Orders and General Safety Orders of the California Division of Industrial Safety, as well as all other applicable regulations as they pertain to the protection of workers from the hazard of caving ground in excavations.

3.2	EXCAVATION

A.	Excavate soil required to locate existing utilities and install the work.

B.	Use hand methods of excavation to locate existing utilities, and to excavate trenches,

2023-06	TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL	31 23 33 4 of 7

pits and holes in congested areas.

C.	 Employ equipment and methods appropriate to the work site.	Small mechanical excavators may be used only in areas where there is sufficient space so as not to damage adjacent improvements, and where the locations of all existing utilities have been determined by hand methods of excavating.

D.	 Cut trenches just wide enough to enable installation and proper bedding and backfill, and to allow inspection.

E.	Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.

F.	Hand trim excavation. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove loose material.

G.	 Excavate trenches, pits or holes bottoming in hardpan to a minimum of 6 inches below the grade for the bottom of the pipe and any couplings, and then backfill to the pipe grade with Type S2, S4 or S5 material, thoroughly compacted. No additional payment will be made for such over-excavation and refill.

H.	 In all trenches or excavation sites where a firm foundation is not encountered, such as soft, spongy, or otherwise unsuitable material, remove the material to a minimum of 12 inches, or to a depth determined by the Engineer, below the bottom of the proposed pipe or structure, and backfill the space with Type S2, S4 or S5 material containing sufficient moisture to allow compaction to 90% relative compaction. No additional payment will be made for such additional excavation or backfill.

I.	 Excavate trenches to provide the design grade of the facility, or as directed by the Engineer.

J.	 Stockpile excavated material to be returned to trench adjacent thereto in location which will not be detrimental to existing improvements, or pedestrian or vehicular traffic. Remove from site all unsuitable or excess material not to be used.

K.	 When excavating through tree roots, perform work by hand and cut roots, where authorized, with a saw.

L.	 Remove excess soil not used as backfill from the work site. Obtain a disposal site off of the Owner’s property and legally dispose of said excess material, all at no additional cost to the Owner.

M.	 If water is encountered during excavations, provide all dewatering measures necessary to construct improvements shown.

N.	 Contractor shall make all provisions necessary, including but not limited to, shoring or sloping back trench walls as required to address sandy soils. The cost of these provisions shall be included in the lump sum amount bid for this work and no separate payment will be made therefore.

2023-06	TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL	31 23 33 5 of 7

3.3	PROTECTION OF EXCAVATIONS

A.	 Provide all shoring and bracing as required and those codified in local, state and federal safety regulations.

B.	Prevent water, caving or sloughing ground from entering excavations.

C.	Maintain excavations free of water.

3.4	BACKFILLING

A.	 Provide type S2 or S5 pipe bedding as required by Plans and compact to 90% of the maximum dry density.

B.	After installation of pipes and appurtenances and placement of pipe bedding material, backfill trenches and excavations to finished grade, or subgrade in areas to receive surface improvements

C.	 Backfill trenches above pipe bedding material and to within 24 inches of finish subgrade with Type S1, S2, S4 or S5 soils, except that that top 12 inches shall be type S2, S3, S4 or S5 soils.

D.	 Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage existing or proposed pipes or other Utilities or Improvements.

E.	 Place and compact all soil backfill in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches in uncompacted thickness.

F.	 Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

G.	 Backfill final 12-inch thickness to finish subgrade in areas to receive concrete, asphalt-concrete, aggregate base, or other non-vegetative surface improvement, with Type S2, S4 or S5 soils.

H.	 Backfill final 12-inch thickness to finish subgrade in areas to receive sod, other vegetation, or bare soil, with Type S2 or S3 soils.

I.	Compact backfill below the top 12-inches to 90% relative compaction.

J.	 In areas to receive buildings, structures, or concrete flatwork, compact the top 12-inches to 90% relative compaction.

K.	 In areas to receive asphalt concrete pavements, compact the top 12-inches to 95% relative compaction.

L.	In planting areas, compact the top 12-inches to 85% relative compaction.

2023-06	TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL	31 23 33 6 of 7

3.5	TOLERANCES

A.	 Top Surface of Backfill under Paved or Concrete Areas: Plus or minus 0.02 feet from required elevations.

B.	 Top Surface of General Backfilling: As required for finish surface to match adjacent improvements or ground.

3.6	FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.	 Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of General Conditions and/or Division 1.

B.	Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D1557.

C.	 If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, recompact, and retest. Retests required due to failure of initial tests shall be paid for by the Contractor.

3.7	PROGRESS AND PROSECUTION

A.	Backfill any excavation opened in any day on that same day.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL	31 23 33 7 of 7

SECTION 32 13 13
SITE CONCRETE IMPROVEMENTS

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1	SECTION INCLUDES

A.	 Provide all material, labor, equipment and services necessary to completely install exterior Portland cement flatwork, cast-in-place concrete, and architectural flatwork concrete,	accessories and other related items, slabs, ramps and sidewalks and walkways, curb and gutter, mowstrips, and other miscellaneous concrete items of the form and dimensions shown on the plans and necessary to complete the project, and in accordance with the requirements of the Standard Specifications as modified and supplemented by these Special Provisions

B.	 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specifications sections, apply to the work of this section.

1.2	RELATED SECTIONS:

A.	Section 32 13 15 - Concrete Reinforcement

B.	Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork: Excavation, Filling, and Grading

1.3	REFERENCES

A.	 SSCDOT - Standard Specifications, Department of Transportation, State of California (Caltrans), latest edition, except for references to method of payment, and references to any state furnished materials.

B.	ACI standards, including but not limited to #304, 305, 306, 308, 309 and 347.

C.	ASTM standards, including but not limited to #C-33, C-39, C-94, C-136, C-143, C-150, and C-309.

1.4	QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.	Furnish concrete materials conforming with SSCDOT.

B.	Perform work in accordance with SSCDOT, unless noted otherwise herein.

1.5	SUBMITTALS

A.	Submit under provisions of Specification Section SUBMITTALS.

2023-06	SITE CONCRETE IMPROVEMENTS	32 13 13 1 of 4

1.	Certificates of compliance for materials and mix designs. 2.	Load tags for delivered material.
3.	Strength testing as required by the approving agency. 4.	Integral color sample, where applicable.
5.	Application instructions for the architectural finish materials. 6.	Accessories and manufacturer’s installation specifications.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1	MATERIALS

A.	 Concrete shall be 6-sack conforming to the requirements of Section 90 of the Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days.	Portland cement shall be Type II Modified and aggregate gradation shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 90-3.4 for 1-inch maximum grading.

B.	 Reinforcement shall comply with relevant portions of Specification Section CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1	PREPARATION

A.	 Subgrade shall conform to the requirements of Specification Section EARTHWORK. The District may elect to verify compacted subgrade elevations by measurement made from adjacent existing improvements or by a template supported by forms.

3.2	GENERAL CONCRETE

A.	 Concrete placement shall conform to the applicable requirements of Standard Specification Sections 51 and 90. Concrete shall not be placed when the air temper-ature in the shade at the project site exceeds 95º F or is below 45º F, or when the temperature of the concrete exceeds 85º F.

B.	After the concrete has been placed, it shall be struck off to proper section and compacted with a grid of parallel metal bars until a layer of mortar not less than 3/8 inch thick has been brought to the surface. All exposed concrete surfaces shall receive a medium broom finish applied transversely to the line of pedestrian traffic or to the longest dimension of the concrete, as applicable.

C.	 General concrete surfaces shall be cured by the curing compound method and shall be protected in accordance with the provisions of Subsections 90-7 and 90-8 of the Standard Specifications.

2023-06	SITE CONCRETE IMPROVEMENTS	32 13 13 2 of 4

3.3	PROTECTION OF CONCRETE

A.	 The Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of all concrete work until such time as all work has been completed and is accepted by the District. The Contractor shall limit vehicular travel across concrete until such time as the concrete has achieved strength sufficient that it can support traffic without damage. In no case, however, will vehicles be allowed to travel across new concrete improvements until seven calendar days have passed since the concrete was placed.

3.4	CONCRETE JOINTS

A.	 Expansion joints and weakened plane joints shall be constructed at the locations shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Where joint locations are not specified on the plans, expansion joints shall be constructed at maximum intervals of 45 feet, and weakened plane joints shall be constructed at maximum intervals of 15 feet.

B.	 Expansion joints shall be considered as weakened plane joints for the purpose of spacing weakened plane joints.	Expansion joints shall be tooled with a ½ inch maximum radius edger, and shall be filled with ½ inch pre-formed expansion joint filler.

3.5	CONCRETE FINISHES

A.	 Where concrete is being installed adjacent to or near existing concrete improvements, match the finish of similar concrete surfaces, i.e. new sidewalks shall match existing sidewalks, new curbs shall match existing curbs, etc.

B.	 Sidewalks and Mowstrips: Medium sweat finish or medium broom finish as required to match existing finishes.

C.	Curbs: Trowel smooth and finish with a light brush.

D.	Gutters: Medium broom finish

E.	 Drive approaches and wheelchair ramps: Broom Finish, perpendicular to the direction of travel

3.6	INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES

A.	 Strictly comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and approved details. Securely anchor work to substrate.

2023-06	SITE CONCRETE IMPROVEMENTS	32 13 13 3 of 4

3.7	REPAIR AND CLEAN-UP

A.	 Contractor shall legally remove all trash, debris, containers and excess materials from the site on a periodic basis, and shall keep the work broom clean until Owner’s acceptance.

B.	 The Contractor shall be held responsible for the repair and/or replacement of new or existing improvements damaged as a result of this work to the satisfaction of the Owner.

C.	 The Contractor shall provide roll-off bins for wash-out of ready mix concrete trucks and pumpers. Do not allow concrete debris or cement water onto soils scheduled for landscape planting.

END OF SECTION

2023-06	SITE CONCRETE IMPROVEMENTS	32 13 13 4 of 4